927GB

Communication
1 Interface
3-Axis Laser Marker
2 EtherNet/IP
MD-X2000/2500 Series
3 PROFINET

Communication Interface
User’s Manual
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read the messages.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Indicates the reference pages and items in this manual.

Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any mistakes or questions, please
contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
 Software License Agreement

Software License Agreement

NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY
PORTION OF THIS SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.
1. Definition
1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise benefit from using the functionality of this Software.
1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable
license to install this Software on all computers used by your entity in order to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software
for backup or archive purposes only.
3. Restrictions.
3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or add any function to this Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third parties.
4. Intellectual Property Rights.
Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and
other intellectual property rights therein.
5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for
any damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software.
6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and the copy of this Software in your possession or
voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this
Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement.
7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan without regards to the principles of
conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain
valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.

927GB 1
Contents

Contents
Introduction Status of device assignment of the MD information area. . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Symbols Input Assemblies Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Cautions Output Assemblies Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Software License Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Word area for writing a PLC request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Chapter 1 Communication Interface Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Communication command list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 KEYENCE KV Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Changing the job No. and starting the marking
RS-232C Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Connection cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Changing the string (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Sending a command
Ethernet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 (An example of command communication). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Connection cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 OMRON PLC CJ2 Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Changing the job No. and starting the marking
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Write/Read command formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Changing the string (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Write command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Sending a command
Read command format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 (An example of command communication). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Target specifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Studio 5000 Logix Designer Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Communication format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Changing the job No. and starting the marking
Header/Delimiter setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Check sum setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Changing the string (An example of bit control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Communication priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Sending a command
Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 (An example of command communication). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
How to interpret the command details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Laser marker operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Chapter 3 PROFINET
Current values and statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Outline of the control by PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Controller setup/management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Operation Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Job No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Devices compatible with PROFINET communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
String/Logo/Barcode setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Marking parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Communication Specification of the Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Basic specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Code overprinting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Periodic communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3D shape setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Status of device assignment of the MD information area. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Work flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Bit area for writing laser marker state on the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Matrix setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Word area for writing laser marker state on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Group/Counter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Bit area for writing the request from the PLC
Operation time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67 onto the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69 Word area for writing a PLC request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Applied Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Variable-length support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Other controller specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Omission of target specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Endian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
If the currently running job No. is the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 GSDML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
If block No.000 is the target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72 When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Omission of parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72 Setup Procedure of PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Sending of linked commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73 Connection Procedure for PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
For WX command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73 Setup of PROFINET Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
For RX command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74 Checking the setup of the Laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Linking the communication command (WXC command) . . . . . . . . 1-74 Modify the settings of the Siemens S7-1200 series.. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Creating new settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 Controlling the Laser Marker Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Communication Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Switching and Marking the Job No. of the Laser Marker. . . . . . . . 3-19
Error response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Use the command communication to change and
Error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 mark the job No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 Reading the Marked 2D Code and Acquiring
ASCII code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 the Assessment Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Model-Specific Input Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80 Execute Ladder Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Download the created ladder program on the PLC.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Confirm/monitor the state of laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Chapter 2 EtherNet/IP Execute ladder program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
What is EtherNet/IP?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
EtherNet/IP communication specifications and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible laser markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cyclic communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cyclic communication with the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to configure the laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
PLC settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
How to configure the KEYENCE KV series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
How to configure the OMRON CJ2 series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
How to configure the Allen-Bradley Control/Compact Logix series. . 2-9

2 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 1
1
Communication Interface

Communication Interface
Communication command list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
RS-232C Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Ethernet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Write/Read command formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Target specifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Communication format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Communication priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Laser marker operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Current values and statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Controller setup/management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Job No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
String/Logo/Barcode setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Marking parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Code overprinting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
3D shape setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Work flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Matrix setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Group/Counter setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Operation time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Applied Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Variable-length support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Omission of target specifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Omission of parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
Sending of linked commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Creating new settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Communication Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
Error response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
Error list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
ASCII code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Model-Specific Input Value List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-1

 Communication command list

Communication command list

Command function Command Ref.

Delete the job DeleteJob 1-10

Basic
Request the READY status Ready 1-10

1 Start the marking laser

Start the guide laser

StartMarking

GuideLaser
1-11

1-11

Stop the guide laser StopMarking 1-11

Communication Interface

Enable/disable the acceptance of start marking (Set/Request) TriggerLock 1-11

Enable/disable the distance pointer DistancePointer 1-12

Read a 2D code Check2DCode3 1-12

Laser marker
Check the focus distance FocusCheck 1-13
operation
Check the Z coordinate ZTrackingPointCheck 1-13

Set/Request the XY tracking XYTracking 1-14

Set/Request the Z tracking ZTracking 1-14

Start the XY tracking and Z tracking 3AxisTracking 1-15

Start the calibration (high accuracy) of the Z tracking ZTrackingManualCalibration 1-15

Internal lighting status (Set/Request) Lighting 1-15

Running job No. (Set/Request) JobNo 1-16

Current counter value setting (Set/Request) Counter 1-16

Current values and I/O encoded character (Set/Request) IoEncodedCharacter 1-16

statuses Request the final marking string MarkedCharacter 1-16

Request the error status Error 1-17

Clear an error ErrorClear 1-17

Position correction (Set/Request) AllPosition 1-18

Date/time setting (Set/Request) TimeSetting 1-18

Laser power offset (Set/Request) PowerOffset 1-19

Controller setup/
management Set barcode verification BarcodeVerification 1-19

Set/Request the shutter function as it relates to the laser safety

LaserSafetyModuleShutter 1-19
module operation.

Timing of the marking complete output ON (Set/Request) PrintCompTimimg 1-19

Movement/stationary marking setting (Set/Request) OnTheFly 1-20

Head orientation (Set/Request) HeadDirection 1-20

Marking order (Set/Request) MarkingOrder 1-20

Continuous stationary marking (Set/Request) ContinuousStationaryMarking 1-21

Movement parameters (Set/Request) OnTheFlyMarking 1-21

Movement marking trigger delay (Set/Request) OnTheFlyTriggerDelay 1-21

Continuous movement marking (Set/Request) ContinuousOnTheFlyMarking 1-22

Job No. Marking range setting (Set/Request) OnTheFlyMarkingArea 1-22

Workpiece position adjustment (Plane) (Set/Request) JobPosition 1-23

Height correction (Set/Request) HeightCorrection 1-23

Common block marking parameters (Set/Request) CommonMarkingParameter 1-24

Marking energy check (Set/Request) MarkingEnergy 1-25

Scanner waiting position when ready (Set/Request) ScannerWaiting 1-25

Type of lighting for the running job (Set/Request) LightingType 1-26

Approach scan speed (Set/Request) ApproachScanSpeed 1-26

1-2 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication command list

Command function Command Ref.

Block type (Set/Request) BlockType 1-27

Barcode type (Set/Request) CodeType 1-27

String and logo files (Set/Request) CharacterString 1-28

Font setting (Set/Request) CharacterFont 1-31

Character size (Set/Request) CharacterSize 1-32

Logo size (Set/Request)

String proportional setting (Set/Request)

LogoSize

CharacterProportional
1-32

1-33
1
String ratio setting (Set/Request) CharacterRatio 1-33

Communication Interface
String/Logo/Barcode
Arc string character layout setting (Set/Request) ArcCharacter 1-34
setting
Barcode/2D code setting (Set/Request) CodeSetting 1-35

Barcode size (Set/Request) BarcodeSize 1-35

GS1DataBar size (Set/Request) GS1DataBarSize 1-36

DataMatrix size (Set/Request) DataMatrixSize 1-36

QR Code size (Set/Request) QRCodeSize 1-37

Block position (Set/Request) BlockPosition 1-38

Block layout (Set/Request) BlockLayout 1-39

Fixed point emission time (Set/Request) FixedPointProcessingTime 1-39

Marking parameters (Set/Request) MarkingParameter 1-40

Barcode/2D code pattern setting (Set/Request) CodePattern 1-41

Hatch logo pattern setting (Set/Request) HatchPattern 1-42

TrueType font pattern setting (Set/Request) TTFPattern 1-43

Barcode/2D code fill marking parameters (Set/Request) CodeFillParameter 1-43

Hatch logo fill marking parameters (Set/Request) HatchParameter 1-44

TrueType font fill marking parameters (Set/Request) TTFParameter 1-45

Marking parameters Photo setting (Set/Request) PhotoSetting 1-45

Marking flag (Set) MarkingEnable 1-46

Individual fill marking parameters (Set/Request) FillMarkingParameter 1-46

Jump Speed (Set/Request) JumpSpeed 1-47

Nudge marking quality setting (Set/Request) MarkingQuality 1-47

Approach (Set/Request) Approach 1-47

Space approach (Set/Request) SpaceApproach 1-48

Curve correction (Set/Request) CurveCorrection 1-48

Barcode/2D code overprinting marking parameters (Set/Request) MultiPassMarkingParameter 1-49

Barcode/2D code overprinting pattern setting (Set/Request) MultiPassPattern 1-50

Barcode/2D code overprinting fill parameters (Set/Request) MultiPassFillParameter 1-51

Quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request) MultiPassQualityLevel 1-51

Code overprinting Approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request) MultiPassApproach 1-51

parameters
Space approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request) MultiPassSpaceApproach 1-52

Curve correction of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request) MultiPassCurveCorrection 1-52

Jump speed of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request) MultiPassJumpSpeed 1-52

Wait time for start marking of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/

MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime 1-52
Request)

3D shape setting (Set/Request) 3DShape 1-53

3D shape type (Set/Request) 3DShapeType 1-53

3D shape position (Set/Request) 3DShapePosition 1-54

Diameter of cylinder shape (Set/Request) CylinderDiameter 1-55

3D shape setting
Cone shape size setting (Set/Request) ConeSize 1-55

Diameter of sphere shape (Set/Request) SphereDiameter 1-55

Position on 3D shape (Set/Request) 3DSurfacePosition 1-56

Cone setting (Set/Request) ConeSetting 1-56

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-3

 Communication command list

Command function Command Ref.

Enable/disable the XY tracking settings (Set/Request) XYTrackingEnable 1-57

Enable/disable the Z tracking settings (Set/Request) ZTrackingEnable 1-57

Set/Request the calibration of the Z tracking ZTrackingCalibration 1-57

Set/Request the warning threshold of the XY tracking XYTrackingCorrectionThreshold 1-58

Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection before marking WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable 1-58

1 Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection before

marking
WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarm
Threshold

WindowCheckBeforeMarking
1-58

Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection before marking 1-58

Sensitivity
Communication Interface

Work flow
Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection after marking WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable 1-59

WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarm
Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection after marking 1-59
Threshold

Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection after marking WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity 1-59

Enable/disable the marking verification function (Set/Request) MarkingConfirmationSetting 1-60

2D code quality check and various settings (Set/Request) CodeReaderSetting 1-60

Capturing condition of the camera function (Set/Request) CameraImagingSetting 1-61

Capturing position of the camera (Set/Request) CameraTargetSetting 1-62

Matrix row & column setting (Set/Request) MatrixSetting 1-63

Matrix size setting (Set/Request) MatrixSize 1-63

Matrix cell reference point (Set/Request) CellReferencePoint 1-64

Matrix setting Cell individual setting (Set/Request) MatrixCell 1-64

Cell marking flag (Set) MatrixCellEnable 1-65

Matrix position setting (Set/Request) MatrixPosition 1-65

Count using invalid marking cells (Set/Request) InactiveCellCount 1-65

Group/Counter Group setting (Set/Request) GroupOffset 1-66

setting Counter setting (Set/Request) CounterSetting 1-66

Request the controller operating time OperatingTime 1-67

Request the laser excited time LaserOperatingTime 1-67

Request the scanner operating time ScannerOperatingTime 1-67

Request the number of shutter operations ShutterOperatingCount 1-67

Operation time Request the number of laser safety module operations LaserSafetyModuleOperatingCount 1-67

Request the head temperature MarkingUnitTemperature 1-68

Request the controller temperature ControllerTemperature 1-68

Request the result of laser power calibration LaserPowerCalibrationResult 1-68

Cumulative marking count 1 and 2 (Set/Request) CumulativeMarkingCount 1-68

Request the lens inspection result WindowCheckResult 1-69

Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection WindowCheckSensitivity 1-69

Set/Request the lens inspection at startup WindowCheckStartup 1-69

Set/Request the lens inspection alarm threshold. WindowCheckAlarmThreshold 1-70

Maintenance
Start the lens inspection WindowCheck 1-70

Laser power measurement LaserPowerCheck 1-70

Delete all logging data LoggingClearAllData 1-70

Delete logging data with a specified period LoggingClearData 1-70

1-4 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Interface

Interface
• Read the “Safety Information” in the user's manual for the applicable model to perform operation in the state that the safety
is secured by using security function even when the network failure occurs.
• Confirm the safe operation by considering the communication delay due to the communication time or network overload
state.

RS-232C Interface
1

Communication Interface
This section explains how to communicate using RS-232C connection.

Connection cables Communication settings

The connector type on the laser marker unit side is D-Sub 9-Pin (Male). The RS-232C communication settings must be configured the same on
When connecting with an external device (PLC, etc.), connect as the laser marker and the external device. Using Marking Builder Plus or
shown below in solid lines using RS-232C straight cable. The following the console, configure the settings such that all of the following items
is an example of connection with an external device with D-Sub 9-Pin are the same.
connector.
Setting item Setting value
Laser Marker side Shield External device side
1 1 • 2400 bps
• 4800 bps
Send 2 2 Send • 9600 bps
3 3 Baud rate • 19200 bps
Receive Receive
• 38400 bps (Default value)
4 4 • 57600 bps
Signal GND 5 5 Signal GND • 115200 bps

6 6 • None (Default value)

Parity check • Odd
7 7
• Even
8 8
• 1 (Default value)
9 9 Stop bit
• 2 bit
Connector hood Connector hood
• None (Default value)
Check sum
• Yes
• The connector will be more susceptible to noise if
the connector hood is not shielded. • The delimiter automatically detects the delimiter setting
• On some external devices, communication cannot of the external device. [EXT] and [CR] are supported.
be established without short-circuiting No. 4/6 pins • The data length is “8 bits fixed”, communication mode
and No. 7/8 pins on the external device side. Refer to is “Full duplex”, synchronization mode is “Start-stop
the manual of the external device. synchronization”, flow control is “None”, and inter-frame
timeout is “3500ms”.
• Only No. 2, 3 and 5 pins are used on the laser marker • It is compliant with the EIA (Electronic Industries
side. Association) RS-232C.
• If the external device also has 9 pins, data is sent from • When sending a non-ASCII string, specify the character
the laser marker to the external device between No.2 code from Unicode (UTF-8), Shift-JIS, or Latin-1. The
pins and data is sent from the external device to the default value is Unicode (UTF-8). If you are using
laser marker between No.3 pins. Marking Builder Plus, you can change the setting from
• The type of fixing screws used on the connector hood is [Communication Settings] under [Controller] in the
M2.6. [Settings] tab.

When using the RS-232C protocol, data corruption

or failure may occur do to noise or poor connection.
Be sure to use the parity or checksum to increase
the reliability of the communication environment.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-5

 Interface

Ethernet interface
This section explains how to communicate using TCP/IP (Non-
procedure) via Ethernet.

Connection cables

1 Connect the laser marker with the external device using a LAN (STP or
UTP) cable.

Pin
MDI signal Signal function
Communication Interface

number

1 TD+ Sent data (+)

No. 1 to 8 from top 2 TD- Sent data (-)

3 RD+ Received data (+)

4 - -

5 - -
RJ-45
Modular connector 6 RD- Received data (-)

7 - -

• Both straight and cross cables are supported. Category

5 cable or higher is recommended.
• Optional LAN cross cable (OP-66843) is sold separately.

Communication settings
When connecting the laser marker with the external device using TCP/
IP via Ethernet, set the IP addresses and subnet masks such that they
are in the same local area network. The default port number is “50002”.
For the detail, refer to “Communication Setup” in [4 Setting Menu” of
“Marking Builder Plus User's Manual.”

• In the case of Ethernet communication, the delimiter

is fixed to [CR] and the check sum is fixed to [None],
respectively.
• If you are using Marking Builder Plus, you can
change the setting from [Communication Settings]
under [Controller] in the [Settings] tab.

For details about communication methods using Profinet

and Ethernet/IP, refer to each manual.

When multiple commands are received from external

equipment via TCP/IP communication, the command
is saved to the buffer (queue) by received order, and
the next command is processed after sending out the
response.

1-6 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Specifications

Communication Specifications
Write/Read command formats Target specifier
If you wish to send a command from the external device to the laser When sending a command to the laser marker, for most commands,
marker, it should be sent/received in the format described below. you need to determine the change target in advance. A target specifier
is inserted before the command in the form of “Target specifier = Target

1
No.”. If you wish to specify multiple targets, they need to be arranged
side-by-side. The types of target specifiers and target number ranges
Write command format are as described below.

Target Target Range

Communication Interface
If the command is changing the setting value of the laser marker or Description
executing an operation, add “WX” on the beginning of the command. Specifier No.

Command WX,Command [CR] JOB 0000 to 1999 Specifies the job No.

Normal : WX,OK [CR] BLK 000 to 255 Specifies the block No.
Response
Error : WX,NG,S***,ErrCode [CR]
00 : Marking confirmation function
An OK response is returned if the change or instruction specified by FNC 00 to 01
01: 2D code reader
the command is successful and returns an error response if it fails. For
more information on the error, refer to “Communication Errors” (Page TRK 000 to 255 Specifies the tracking No.
1-76).
A response is returned in the timing when the specified change or OLP 0 to 9 Specifies the overprinting No.
instruction has completed.
3DS 000 to 255 Specifies the 3D shape No.
• The spelling of “Command” is not case-sensitive. Both
cases will be accepted. Specifies the number of rows and
• The maximum command byte length is 4096 bytes. You columns of the matrix. The number
need to split the command if you wish to send a longer will be assigned with priority given to
byte length. rows, in reference to the top left of
• The command other than strings is sent in ASCII format. the matrix.

Read command format CEL 00001 to 65025

If the command is requesting the setting value or the status of the laser
marker, add “RX” on the beginning of the command.

Command RX,Command [CR]

Response RX,OK,Response [CR]

The value and status specified by the command are returned in a

response. Since request commands can be sent/received at any time,
no errors will occur as long as the communication format is correct. The GRP 000 to 255 Specifies the group No.
RX command returns a fixed-length response.
CTR 0 to 9/A to J Specifies the counter No.
• The information in brackets [ ] indicates the control code.
[CR] is 0Dh in hexadecimal.
• Use ASCII when sending double-type characters such • A “,” (comma) separator is inserted between the target
as Kanji characters or a Unicode string. specifier and the command.
• Insert a “, “ (comma) separator after a command, • A target specifier may be unnecessary for commands
response or check sum. that directly operate the laser marker.
• The maximum response byte length is 4096 bytes. • You can also specify CEL using row & column headers.
It is specified in the form of “Row number-Column
• A MarkedCharacter command is a request command,
number” in the range between “001-001” and “255-255”.
however, there is a restriction for the timing of sending/
receiving. • The JOB specifier can be substituted by the PRG
specifier used by a Marking Builder 3 supported model.
PRG is accepted as the same as JOB.

For example, to change a string, you need to specify the job No. and
block No. in advance. The command will therefore be as an example
described below.

„„
Example of command for changing the string
of job No. 1 and block No.1 to “ABC”
Command WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC
[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-7

 Communication Specifications

Communication format Communication priority

The laser marker has 6 types of communication paths that generally
support simultaneous connections. However, when the laser marker
Header/Delimiter setting shifts to a specific status via a communication path, priority will be
given to the specific communication path. This means that only request
commands will be accepted for communication paths other than the
RS-232C connection priority communication path. The following table shows the conditions
under which a priority communication path will occur.

1
A response is returned automatically detecting the header/delimiter as [STX]
/ [ETX] or [None] / [CR].
Communication path Priority acquisition period
Ethernet connection • The length of time from when the WX
Only [None]/[CR] are supported. command is sent until a response is
Communication Interface

External communication returned

(RS-232C/Ethernet) • From sending the CreateJob command,
„„
[STX]/[ETX] command examples • until a response is returned from the
EndJob command
Command [STX]WX,Command[ETX]
• During acquiring mastership
Response [STX]WX,OK[ETX]
• During I/O terminal monitor mode
Marking Builder Plus
transition
(USB/Ethernet)
„„
[None]/[CR] command examples • During transition of settings and backup
data
Command WX,Command[CR]
• During test marking mode transition
Response WX,OK[CR] • During terminal block simulate mode
Console
transition
(Dedicated cable)
• During transition of settings and backup
data

Check sum setting • Blocking communication: The length

of time from when the setting change
You can add a check sum for checking the data integrity for RS-232C command is sent until a response is
communication only. A check sum is added immediately before the MBP ActiveX returned
delimiter as a 2-digit hexadecimal string. The 2-digit string is calculated (USB/Ethernet) • Non-blocking communication: The
based on the horizontal parity (XOR). The following shows an example length of time from when the setting
of the commands and calculating formulas. change command is sent until the next
event is completed

„„
A command example with check sum added Profinet, EtherNet/IP
The length of time from the start of a
setting change instruction, etc. until the
(Ethernet)
Command WX,Command,48[CR] operation is completed

Response WX,OK,3B[CR]

Sent code Received code

W 57h 0101 0111b W 57h 0101 0111b
XOR XOR
X 58h 0101 1000b X 58h 0101 1000b
XOR XOR
, 2Ch 0010 1100b , 2Ch 0010 1100b
XOR XOR
C 43h 0100 0011b O 4Fh 0100 1111b
XOR XOR
o 6Fh 0110 1111b K 4B 0110 1011b
XOR XOR
m 6Dh 0110 1101b , 2Ch 0010 1100b
XOR
m 6Dh 0110 1101b 0011 1011b
XOR
a 61h 0110 0001b ASCII conversion
XOR 3Bh
n 6Eh 0110 1110b
XOR
d 64h 0110 0100b
XOR
, 2Ch 0010 1100b

0100 1000b
ASCII conversion
48h

The check sum is calculated excluding the header,

delimiter and check sum sections.

1-8 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Lower limit threshold

Communication Interface
0: Disabled
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”
Command Details
Upper limit threshold

Command Details
0: Disabled
Parameter B:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

Lower limit threshold (J)

C: 00000.01 to 99999.99 8 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0

How to interpret theD:command details

00000.01 to 99999.99 8 bytes
Upper limit threshold (J)
* B: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0
This section explains how to interpret the command details using the following command as an example.
Marking energy check will be canceled when the next trigger is accepted within 2 seconds of completion of the marking. Therefore, make
sure to allow at least 2 seconds between the marking completion and the next marking start.

1
This shows the target specifier required for This is the default value of the job
thisScanner
(13) command.
waiting position when ready (Set/Request) parameters.

Command ScannerWaiting 14 bytes

Communication Interface
Description Sets/Requests the scanner waiting position when ready.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

Standby coordinate
0: Auto
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Custom coordinate
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Standby X coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
Parameter
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Standby Y coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000 Standby Z coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000 * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000

When setting the standby coordinate to auto, standby is done on the coordinate where the scanner will be used firstly at work flow.
The input range varies depending on the laser marker area size. Input range is listed in the “Model-Specific Input
The applicable models for each area size are as described below. Value List” (Page 1-80).
• Normal : MD-X2000/2500 Series
• Wide : MD-X2020/2520 Series
Enter a fixed value when the value of the specific parameter is “0”.
• Small : MD-X2050 Series
* Since the fixed values are ignored on the laser marker side, values
other than the fixed values will be accepted as long as they are
within the parameter input range.

„„
WX command example
This command changes the scanner waiting position when ready (X: 5mm, Y: 10mm, Z: -5mm) of job No.0005.

Command WX,JOB=0005,ScannerWaiting=1,0005.000,0010.000,-005.000[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

„„
RX command example
This command requests the scanner waiting position when ready (X: 5 mm, Y: 10 mm, Z: -5 mm) of job No.0005.

Command RX,JOB=0005,ScannerWaiting
- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication
[CR] Interface User’s Manual - 1-25
Response RX,OK,1,0005.000,0010.000,-005.000[CR]

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-9

 Command Details

Basic
(1) Delete the job
Command DeleteJob 13 bytes
Description Deletes the jobs in the laser marker.

Target None

1 WX
Command

Response
WX,DeleteJob=A,A,A,A...[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
Communication Interface

Command
RX None
Response

Deletes all jobs in the case of the job No.

9999 to be deleted
Parameter A:0000 to 1999/9999 4 bytes
You can specify multiple job No. for deletion
by separating them with commas.

• To delete multiple jobs simultaneously, send the command as described below.

WX,DeleteJob=0001,0002,0005,0006[CR]
• When you specify multiple jobs, an error will occur if any one of the specified job No. does not exist.
• If a running job is specified, an error occurs.

(2) Request the READY status

Command Ready 5 bytes
Description Requests whether the laser marker is in the ready status.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX,Ready[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

0 : READY ON
1 : READY OFF (Error occurring)
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte
2 : READY OFF (Marking or expansion in
progress)

If the value of parameter A is “1”, you cannot perform any marking until the error is cleared. Clear the error using the ErrorClear command.
However, if the occurring error is a terminal block status error (T***), check the ON/OFF status of the terminal block.

1-10 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

Laser marker operation

(1) Start the marking laser
Command StartMarking 12 bytes
Description Starts the marking laser.

Target None

WX
Command

Response
WX, StartMarking [CR]

WX,OK [CR]
1

Communication Interface
Command
RX None
Response

Parameter None

An error response is returned when marking is canceled from the terminal block, etc.

(2) Start the guide laser

Command GuideLaser 10 bytes
Description Starts the guide laser marking using the guide laser type specified by parameter A.

The guide laser is emitted for the same length of time as the marking time when selecting once and emitted
Target
continuously for 30 seconds for all other emission types.

Command WX,GuideLaser=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Guide laser type

1: Once
2: Continuous
Parameter A:1~5 1 byte
3: Area frame
4: Work image
5: Block frame

• This command returns a response as soon as the guide laser emission starts.
• The emission can be canceled using the “StopMarking” command.

(3) Stop the guide laser

Command StopMarking 11 bytes
Description Cancels the guide laser marking.

Target None

Command WX,StopMarking[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Parameter None

(4) Enable/disable the acceptance of start marking (Set/Request)

Command TriggerLock 11 bytes
Description Enables/disables acceptance of triggers from the terminal block and/or communication path.

Target None

Command WX,TriggerLock=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,TriggerLock[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Acceptance of start marking

0: Enabled
Parameter A:0/1 1 bytes
1: Disabled
* Default value “0”

If this command is received during marking, the marking will not stop but the next marking start input will be rejected.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-11

 Command Details

(5) Enable/disable the distance pointer

Command DistancePointer 15 bytes
Description Turns on/off the distance pointer.

Target None

Command WX,DistancePointer=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,DistancePointer[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

Distance Pointer
Communication Interface

Parameter A:0/1 1 byte 0: Off

1: On

This command returns a response as soon as the distance pointer is turned on/off.

(6) Read a 2D code

Command Check2DCode3 12 bytes
Description Reads the 2D code inside the area using the built-in camera.

Target None

Command WX,Check2DCode3=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J
WX
Response WX,OK,K,L

Command
RX None
Response

Capture position
0: Current scanner position
A: 1 byte
1: Custom coordinate
2: Block coordinate

X coordinate (mm)
B: 8 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/2

Y coordinate (mm)
C: 8 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/2

Z coordinate (mm)
D: 8 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/2

Reading area (%)

No area specification when “0”
E: 3 bytes • A: Same as 100% when 0/1
• A: Auto area specification when 2
• G: Same as 100% when 0/1

Block No.
F: 3 bytes
A: Fixed value of “0” when 0/1

Parameter Camera zoom

0: Whole wide
1: Whole standard
G:0/1/2/3 1 byte 2: Coax wide
3: Coax standard
* Default value “2”
* The MD-X2050 cannot select 0/1.

Brightness
H: -100 to 0100 4 bytes
* Default value “0”

Gamma correction value

I: 0.1 to 5.0 3 bytes
* Default value “1.0”

Lighting type
0: Internal lighting (normal)
1: Internal lighting (halation removal)
J:0/1/2 1 byte
2: External lighting
* Default value “2”
* The MD-X2050 cannot select 0/1.

K: A to D/F 1 byte AIM-DPM total grade

L: Encoded string - Encoded string of 2D code

• The S087 communication error “2D code reading error” is returned if the 2D code cannot be found.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.
• A: When it is 2, what can be read is from after marking to the next marking.

1-12 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(7) Check the focus distance

Command FocusCheck 10 bytes
Measures the difference between the distance to the workpiece and the reference distance for the number of times
Description
specified in parameter A and returns its average value as the focus deviation amount.

Target None

Command WX,FocusCheck=A[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK,B[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Communication Interface
A:01~10 2 bytes Measurement count (times)
Parameter
B: -100.0~0100.0 6 bytes Focus deviation amount (mm)

• If the Z coordinate of the position correction has been input, this value will be subtracted from the focus deviation amount.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

(8) Check the Z coordinate

Command ZTrackingPointCheck 19 bytes
Measures the specified XYZ coordinates by the number of times specified by a parameter.
Description
Acquires the average and returns a gap amount from a specified Z coordinate.

Target None

Command WX,ZtrackingPointCheck=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK,F,G[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

A: Depends on the area size

X coordinate (mm)
Normal : -062.500~0062.500 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Wide : -165.000~0165.000

B: Depends on the area size

Y coordinate (mm)
Normal : -062.500~0062.500 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Wide :-165.000~0165.000

Z coordinate (mm)
C: -21.000 to 021.000 7 bytes
* Default value “0”
Parameter
Measurement count
D: 1 to 10 2 bytes
* Default value “0”

Sampling cycle
E: 0 to 4 1 byte 0 (short) to 4 (long)
* Default value “0”

Gap amount from a specified Z coordinate

F: -99.00 to 099.00 6 byte
(mm)

G: 000 to 100 3 byte Stability

• It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

• The longer the sampling cycle is, the higher the reliability of the measurement is, even though the measurement time will get longer.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-13

 Command Details

(9) Set/Request the XY tracking

Command XYTracking 10 bytes
Executes a XY tracking by specifying the XY tracking No. of the currently running job to acquire the workpiece gap
Description
amount.

Target None

Command WX,XYTracking=A[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]

Command RX,XYTracking=A[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
Communication Interface

A:00~07 2 bytes XY tracking No.

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -125.000~0125.000 8 bytes X coordinate gap amount (mm)
Wide : -330.000~0330.000

C: Depends on the area size

Normal : -125.000~0125.000 8 bytes Y coordinate gap amount (mm)
Wide : -330.000~0330.000
Parameter
D: -180.000~0180.000 8 bytes θ gap amount (°)

E: 000~100 3 bytes Correlation value

F: 0000 to 9999 4 bytes Execution time (ms)

Result
0: Failure
G:0/1/2 1 byte
1: Success
2: Success (correlation value: low)

• The RX command acquires the result at the previous execution. The previous result will be cleared when changing the job No. of the
current operation.
• When there is no setting of the specified tracking No., S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• When there is no result of the specified tracking No., S104 tracking result request error will occur.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(10) Set/Request the Z tracking

Command ZTracking 9 bytes
Description Executes/acquires the result of a Z tracking.

Target None

Command WX,ZTracking=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]

Command RX,ZTracking=A[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]

A:0~255 3 bytes Z tracking No.

B:-42.000~042.000 7 bytes Z coordinate gap amount (mm)

X rotation angle gap amount (°)

C: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes * Fixed value of “0” when correcting Z
coordinate

Y rotation angle gap amount (°)

D: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes * Fixed value of “0” when correcting Z
Parameter coordinate

E: 000 to 100 3 bytes Stability

F: 0000 to 9999 4 bytes Execution time (ms)

Result
0: Failure
G: 0/1/2 1 byte 1: Success
2: Success (stability: low)
3: Success (out of tolerance range)

• The RX command acquires the result at the previous execution. The previous result will be cleared when changing the job No. of the
current operation.
• When there is no setting of the specified tracking No., S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• When there is no result of the specified tracking No., S104 tracking result request error will occur.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

1-14 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(11) Start the XY tracking and Z tracking

Command 3AxisTracking 13 bytes
Description Executes a XY tracking and Z tracking of the currently running job.

Target None

Command WX,3AxisTracking
WX
Response WX,OK

RX
Command

Response
None
1
Parameter None

Communication Interface
The results can be acquired by RX, XYTracking = A, and RX, ZTracking = A.

(12) Start the calibration (high accuracy) of the Z tracking

Command ZTrackingManualCalibration 26 bytes
Description Executes the calibration of a Z tracking (high accuracy).

Target None

Command WX,ZTrackingManualCalibration[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command
RX None
Response

It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

(13) Internal lighting status (Set/Request)

Command Lighting 8 bytes
Description Set/Request the on/off status of the internal lighting

Target None

Command WX,Lighting=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,Lighting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Status of lighting
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte 0: Off
1: On

It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-15

 Command Details

Current values and statuses

(1) Running job No. (Set/Request)
Command JobNo 9 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the running job No.

Target None

1 WX
Command

Response
WX,JobNo=A[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
Communication Interface

Command RX,JobNo[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:0000~1999 4 bytes Specifies the job No.

• The S021 communication error “Job No. Not Registered Error” is returned if you specify a non-registered job No.
• An OK response is returned when a currently running job No. has been specified. At that point in time, the READY output becomes OFF
for an instant due to switching of the job No.

(2) Current counter value setting (Set/Request)

Command Counter 7 bytes
Specifies the counter No. and changes/requests the current counter value as well as the current repetitive marking
Description
count.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999, CTR=0 to 9/A to J,

Command WX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,Counter=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,Counter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

A:0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes Current counter value

Parameter
B: 0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes Repetitive marking count

(3) I/O encoded character (Set/Request)

Command IoEncodedCharacter 18 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the string to use as the I/O encoded character.

Target None

Command WX,IoEncodedCharacter=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,IoEncodedCharacter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:00 to 35 2 bytes Specify the I/O encoded character

This command returns a response very quickly as it is processed immediately regardless of the job expansion time.

(4) Request final marking string

Command MarkedCharacter 15 bytes
Description Specify the job No. and block No. to request the string marked by the laser marker.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX,MarkedCharacter=A,B[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,C[CR]

A:0000 to 1999 4 bytes Job No.

Parameter B: 000 to 255 3 bytes Block No.

C: Text - Marking string

• The update characters are returned in the form of an actual marking string.
• Make sure to send this command after the marking. The S029 communication error “Mark data request error” is returned if you send the
command without performing any marking.
• In matrix marking, the response returns the mark data of the last marked cell (block).
• If you requested something in relation to the block other than the character strings, “ “ (blank data) will be returned in the response.

1-16 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(5) Request the error status

Command Error 5 bytes
Description Requests the error occurring in the laser marker.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

RX
Command

Response
RX,Error[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,B,B...[CR] 1
Displays the status of the errors. If no error is

Communication Interface
A: 0,1 1 byte
occurring, the response returns “0”, if it is, “1”.
Parameter
Displays the currently occurring errors in
B: E003 to E531/W001 to W531/T000 to T017 3 bytes
comma delimited format.

• If multiple errors are occurring in the laser marker, a response is returned in comma delimited format as follows.
RX,OK,1,E001,E002,W100,T000[CR]
• For details of each error, refer to the User's Manual of the laser marker unit.

(6) Clear an error

Command ErrorClear 10 bytes
Description Clears the errors currently occurring in the laser marker.

Target None

Command WX,ErrorClear[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Parameter None

• An error cannot be cleared unless its cause has been rectified.

• When you send the ErrorClear command with the cause of the laser marker error unresolved, an “OK” response is returned but the error
status will not be cleared.
• Check the ON/OFF state of the terminal block because the error clear cannot be performed for the terminal block error (T*** error except
T000).
• The error clear can be performed for T000 (during remote interlock) if the remote interlock terminal is satisfied.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-17

 Command Details

Controller setup/management
(1) Position correction (Set/Request)
Command AllPosition 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the position correction in the Controller Setup.

Target None

1 WX
Command

Response
WX,AllPosition=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
Communication Interface

Command RX,AllPosition[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

X rotation angle (°)

A:-090.000 to 0090.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

Y rotation angle (°)

B: -090.000 to 0090.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

θ angle (°)
C: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 X coordinate correction amount (mm)
8 bytes
Parameter Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 * Default value “0”
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000

E: Depends on the area size

Normal: -062.500 to 0062.500 Y coordinate correction amount (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “X/Y coordinates position correction” * Default value “0”
in “Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

F: Depends on the area size

Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000 Z correction amount (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000 * Default value “0”
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000

• This command is applied to all jobs. If the job pre-expansion function is enabled, it takes time because the response is returned after all
job expansion processings are finished.
• The X/Y rotations angle will be disabled in jobs containing blocks having other than a 3D shape of “XY plane”.
• The following restrictions exist in the case of on-the-fly marking.
• The coordinate correction with the same coordinate on the movement direction (X/Y coordinate) is disabled
• The rotation correction of the coordinate that crosses orthogonally on the movement direction (X/Y rotation angle) is disabled
• θ angle can be corrected up to ±2.000°

(2) Date/time setting (Set/Request)

Command TimeSetting 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the date and time of the internal clock.

Target None

Command WX,TimeSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command RX,TimeSetting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

A:2000 to 2099 4 bytes Year: 4 digits

B: 01 to 12 2 bytes Month

C: 01 to 31 2 bytes Day
Parameter
D: 00 to 24 2 bytes Hour

E:00 to 60 2 bytes Minute

F: 00 to 60 2 bytes Second

1-18 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(3) Laser power offset (Set/Request)

Command PowerOffset 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the laser power offset in the Unit Setup.

Target None

Command WX,PowerOffset=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,PowerOffset[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR] 1
Power offset amount (%)

Communication Interface
Parameter A:-100.0 to 0100.0 6 bytes
* Default value “0”

• If the power offset value set to the block's laser power exceeds 100%, the value will be fixed at 100%.
• This command is applied to all jobs. If the job pre-expansion function is enabled, it takes time because the response is returned after all
job expansion processings are finished.
• This command is not applied to the block whose laser power is 0%.

(4) Set barcode verification

Command BarcodeVerification 19 bytes
This command is used in the barcode verification function. When this command is accepted on the barcode verification
Description screen, the collation string will be associated with the job No. When this command is accepted in Run mode, the
settings will switch to the job No. matching the collation string.

Target None

Command WX,BarcodeVerification=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Barcode verification string (Max. 20

Parameter A: Text -
characters)

You can access Marking Builder Plus barcode verification screen by following the procedure below.
[Settings] tab > [Controller] > [Options] > [Register code] under [Barcode verification]

(5) Set/Request the shutter function as it relates to the laser safety module operation.
Command LaserSafetyModuleShutter 24 bytes
Description Set/Request the shutter to open/close when the laser safety module input is off.

Target None

Command WX,LaserSafetyModuleShutter=A
WX
Response WX,OK

Command RX,LaserSafetyModuleShutter
RX
Response RX,OK,A

Shutter status
0: Do not close the shutter when the safety
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte input is off
1: Close the shutter when the safety input is off
* Default value “0”

When the shutter status turns to “1”, the restoration time from the safety input on will be extended.

(6) Timing of the marking complete output ON (Set/Request)

Command PrintCompTiming 15 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the timing of the marking complete output ON.

Target None

Command WX,PrintCompTiming=A
WX
Response WX,OK

Command RX,PrintCompTiming
RX
Response RX,OK,A

Timing of the marking complete output

0: After completing the marking operation
1: When completing the operation of the
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
marking verification and 2D code reader
function
* Default value “0”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-19

 Command Details

Job No.
(1) Moving/stationary marking setting (Set/Request)
Command OnTheFly 8 bytes
Description Toggles the stationary/movement marking setting and changes/requests the movement direction.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

1 WX
Command

Response
WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFly=A,B[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
Communication Interface

Command RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFly[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

Stationary/Moving marking setting

0: Stationary marking
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Moving marking
* Default value “0”

Moving direction
Parameter Sets the line flow direction.
0: Bottom
B: 0 to 3 1 byte 1: Right
2: Top
3: Left
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0

The line flow direction will be determined in reference to the positional relationship with the head orientation.

(2) Head orientation (Set/Request)

Command HeadDirection 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the head orientation.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,HeadDirection=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,HeadDirection[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Head orientation
Sets the orientation of the head with reference
to the marking area.
0: left
1: Left (Mirror invert)
2: Right (Mirror invert)
Parameter A:0 to 7 1 bytes
3: Right
4: Bottom (Mirror invert)
5: Top
6: Bottom
7: Top (Mirror invert)
* Default value “0”

(3) Marking order (Set/Request)

Command MarkingOrder 12 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the marking order.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,MarkingOrder=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,MarkingOrder[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Marking order
0: Group/block no. order
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: Auto
* Default value “0”

This command is only enabled for stationary marking.

1-20 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(4) Continuous stationary marking (Set/Request)

Command ContinuousStationaryMarking 27 bytes
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function, marking count, and interval of the continuous marking function in
Description
stationary marking.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,ContinuousStationaryMarking=A,B,C[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,ContinuousStationaryMarking[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Communication Interface
Continuous marking setting
1: Disabled
A:1/2 1 byte
2: Enabled
* Default value “1”
Parameter
Continuous marking count (times)
B: 00002 to 65535 5 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “2” when 1

Continuous interval (s)

C: 0000.0 to 0009.9 6 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1

This command is only enabled for stationary marking.

(5) Movement parameters (Set/Request)

Command OnTheFlyMarking 15 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the movement parameters of the movement marking function.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarking=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarking[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

Moving method
0: Constant
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Encoder
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size Line speed (mm/s)

Normal : 0000.1 to 4000.0 * A: Fixed value of “0.1” when 1
Parameter 6 bytes
Other model : “Line speed” of “Model-Specific * Default value “Normal: 300”/”Wide:
Input Value List” (Page 1-80) 450”/”Small: 150”

C: 0 1 byte Fixed value

Encoder pulse count (Pulse/mm)

D: 001.0 to 200.0 5 bytes * Default value “Normal: 50”/”Wide:
20”/”Small: 100”

This command is only enabled for movement marking.

(6) Movement marking trigger delay (Set/Request)

Command OnTheFlyTriggerDelay 20 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the “distance to the sensor” and “marking position offset” of the movement marking function.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyTriggerDelay=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyTriggerDelay[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

Distance to sensor (mm)

A:0000.0 to 1200.0 6 bytes * Default value : “Normal: 62.6”/”Wide:
Parameter 165.1”/”Small: 25.1”

Marking position offset (mm)

B: -1200.0 to 01200.0 7 bytes
* Default value “0”

• This command is only enabled for movement marking.

• Configure the setting such that the sum of “the distance to the sensor” and “marking position offset” is greater than the start position in the
movement range setting. If the movement range setting is disabled, values smaller than the default value will not be accepted.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-21

 Command Details

(7) Continuous movement marking (Set/Request)

Command OnTheFlyContinuousMarking 25 bytes
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function, marking count, and interval of the continuous marking function in
Description
movement marking.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyContinuousMarking=A,B,C[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyContinuousMarking[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]
Communication Interface

Continuous marking setting

0: Mark while trigger ON
A:0/1/2 1 bytes 1: Continuous marking disabled
2: Continuous marking enabled
* Default value “1”
Parameter
Continuous marking count (times)
B: 00002 to 65535 5 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “2” when 0/1

Continuous interval (mm)

C: 0000.1 to 1200.0 6 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “100” when 1

This command is only enabled for movement marking.

(8) Marking range setting (Set/Request)

Command OnTheFlyMarkingArea 19 bytes
Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function, start position, and end position of the marking range setting of the
Description
movement marking function.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarkingArea=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,OnTheFlyMarkingArea[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Marking range setting

0: Disabled
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size

Start position (mm)
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Parameter 8 bytes * Default value : “Normal: 31.25”/”Wide:
Other model : “Start position” of “Model-Specific
82.5”/”Small: 12.5”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

C: Depends on the area size

End position (mm)
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
8 bytes * Default value : “Normal: -31.25”/”Wide:
Other model : “End position” of “Model-Specific
-82.5”/”Small: -12.5”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

This command is only enabled for movement marking.

1-22 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(9) Workpiece position adjustment (Plane) (Set/Request)

Command JobPosition 15 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the correction inside the horizontal plane in the workpiece position adjustment.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,JobPosition=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,JobPosition[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR] 1
A: Depends on the area size

Communication Interface
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Movement reference point X(mm)
Other model : “Movement reference point X/ 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Y coordinates” of “Model-Specific Input Value List”
(Page 1-80)

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Movement reference point Y(mm)
Other model : “Movement reference point X/ 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Y coordinates” of “Model-Specific Input Value List”
(Page 1-80)
Parameter
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 X coordinate correction amount (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 * Default value “0”
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : -125.000 to 0125.000 Y coordinate correction amount (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “Correction amount X/Y” of “Model- * Default value “0”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

θ angle correction amount (°)

E:-180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

• The θ angle correction is performed, where the origin is the position where the correction amount has been applied to the movement
reference point.
• Workpiece position adjustment is only enabled for stationary marking.

(10) Height correction (Set/Request)

Command HeightCorrection 16 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the correction method and setting values for the workpiece position correction in the height direction.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,HeightCorrection=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,HeightCorrection[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

Height correction method

0: Fixed
A:0/6 1 byte
6: Auto focus (MD-X2050 only)
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size

Correction amount Z coordinate (mm)
Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000
7 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when 5/6
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000
* Default value “0”
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000

Measurement count (times)

C: 1 to 9 1 byte * A: Fixed value of “3” when 0
* Default value “3”

Parameter D: Depends on the area size

Upper tolerance limit (mm)
Normal : -20.999 to 042.000
7 bytes * A: Fixed value of “21” when 0
“Upper tolerance limit” of “Model-Specific Input
* Default value “21”
Value List” (Page 1-80)

E: Depends on the area size

Lower tolerance limit (mm)
Normal : -20.999 to 042.000
7 bytes * A: Fixed value of “-21” when 0
“Lower tolerance limit” of “Model-Specific Input
* Default value “-21”
Value List” (Page 1-80)

If out of range,
1: Mark (warning output)
F: 1/2 1 byte 2: Do not mark (error output)
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 0
* Default value “1”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-23

 Command Details

(11) Common block marking parameters (Set/Request)

Command CommonMarkingParameter 22 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the common block marking parameters that can be used commonly in jobs.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,CommonMarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,CommonMarkingParameter[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L[CR]

Common laser power (%)

Communication Interface

A:000.0 to 100.0 5 bytes

* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : 00001 to 12000 Common scan speed (mm/s)
5 bytes
Other model : “Scan speed” of “Model-Specific * Default value “1000”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

C: Differs depending on the model

Normal : 000 to 400 Common pulse frequency (kHz)
3 bytes
Other model : “Pulse frequency” of “Model- * Default value “100”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : 0210 to 0210 Common spot variable
4 bytes
Other model : “Spot variable” of “Model-Specific * Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

Common marking count (times)

E:001 to 100 3 bytes
* Default value “1”

F: Depends on the area size

Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000 Common Z coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000 * Default value “0”
Parameter Small : -015.000 to 0015.000

Common fill interval (mm)

G: 0.000 to 1.000 5 bytes
* Default value “0.06”

Common quality level

00: Top speed
01: Speed priority
02: Standard
H: 00 to 04/06 2 bytes
03: High quality
04: Top quality
06: Top speed 2
* Default value “2”

Common skip cross (mm)

I: 00.000 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0”

End Point Control:

J: 0/1 1 byte 0: Optimize
1: Any value

End Point ON Control (%)

K: 000 to 200 3 bytes
* Fixed value “100”

End Point OFF Control (%)

L: 000 to 200 3 bytes
* Fixed value “100”

The fixed value is input for the end point control. It cannot be changed.

1-24 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(12) Marking energy check (Set/Request)

Command MarkingEnergy 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the ON/OFF of the marking energy check function and the threshold setting.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,MarkingEnergy=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,MarkingEnergy[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR] 1
Lower limit threshold

Communication Interface
0: Disabled
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

Upper limit threshold

0: Disabled
Parameter B:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

Lower limit threshold (J)

C: 00000.01 to 99999.99 8 bytes
* A: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0

Upper limit threshold (J)

D: 00000.01 to 99999.99 8 bytes
* B: Fixed value of “0.01” when 0

• Marking energy check will be canceled when the next trigger is accepted within 2 seconds of completion of the marking. Therefore, make
sure to allow at least 2 seconds between the marking completion and the next marking start.
• It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

(13) Scanner waiting position when ready (Set/Request)

Command ScannerWaiting 14 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the scanner waiting position when ready.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,ScannerWaiting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

Standby coordinate
0: Auto
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Custom coordinate
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Standby X coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000
Parameter
C: Depends on the area size
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Standby Y coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000 Standby Z coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000 * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000

When setting the standby coordinate to auto, standby is done on the coordinate where the scanner will be used firstly at work flow.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-25

 Command Details

(14) Type of lighting for the running job (Set/Request)

Command LightingType 12 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the type of lighting set by a job during operation.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,LightingType=A
WX
Response WX,OK

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,LightingType

RX,OK,A

* Type of lightings at normal

Communication Interface

0: Internal lighting
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte
1: Internal lighting (halation removal)
2: External lighting

(15) Approach scan speed (Set/Request)

Command ApproachScanSpeed 17 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the approach scan speed.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,ApproachScanSpeed=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,ApproachScanSpeed[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Normal : 00000 to 04000 Approach scan speed (mm/s)
Parameter 5 bytes
Other model : “Approach scan speed” of “Model- * Default value “1000”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

1-26 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

String/Logo/Barcode setting
(1) Block type (Set/Request)
Command BlockType 9 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the block type.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

WX
Command

Response
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockType=A[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
1

Communication Interface
Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockType[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Block type
-04: Hatch logo
-03: Photo
-02: Workpiece image logo
-01: Logo
Parameter A:-04 to 004/009 3 bytes 000: Horizontal characters
001 :Vertical characters
002: Arc clockwise
003: Arc counterclockwise
004: Fixed Point
009: Barcode, 2D code

• When creating a new block, send this command to a non-registered block No.
• When you change the block type, the association with the 3D shape No. and the X/Y/Z coordinate layout information will be initialized.
• Fixed point is only supported in stationary marking.
• When the changing command is sent, the character string becomes (a) space(s).

(2) Barcode type (Set/Request)

Command CodeType 8 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the barcode type.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeType=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeType[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Barcode type
01: CODE39
02: ITF
03: 2of5
04: NW7
05: JAN
06: CODE128
07: QR Code Model 1
08: QR Code Model 2
09: Micro QR Code
Parameter A:01 to 16 2 bytes
10: DataMatrix ECC200
11: GS1 DataBar(Truncated)
12: GS1 DataBar(Truncated) CC-A
13: GS1 DataBar Stacked
14: GS1 DataBar Stacked CC-A
15: GS1 DataBar Limited
16: GS1 DataBar Limited CC-A
17: GS1 DataMatrix
18: CODE93
* Default value “1”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-27

 Command Details

(3) String and logo files (Set/Request)

Command CharacterString 15 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the string or logo/photo file.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterString=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterString[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

• If the block type is “-4 to -1”, the parameters

Communication Interface

are sent in the following format:

Logo: %L<File name>
External character %F<File name>
Workpiece image: %K<File name>
Hatch logo: %T<File name>
Photo: %Z<File name>
Parameter A: String/Logo file name - Grayscale photo: %I<File name>
High resolution photo: %X<File name>
• If the block type is “0 to 3”, send the
parameter in string format (in less than 510
single-byte or double-byte characters).
• If the block type is “9”, send a string that
adheres to the barcode/2D code character
input rules.

1-28 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo/-3: Photo/-2: Workpiece image/-1: Logo/00:
Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise/09: Barcode/2D Code”.
• To send a “, (comma)” as a string, send it in the form of “%044A” (ASCII).
• To send a “%” as a string, send it in the form of “%%” (ASCII).
• To set update characters, send the following in ASCII format.

Without zero suppression With zero suppression

Type Encoding
Without expiration With expiration Without expiration With expiration

1
Year: 4 digits None %4Y %4T Y - -
None %2Y %2T Y -
Year: 2 digits
yes %2P Y %2P T Y

Communication Interface
None %1Y %1T Y
Year: 1 digits - -
yes %1P Y %1P T Y
Right-aligned Right-aligned
%2M %2T M
None %02M %02T M
Month Left-aligned Left-aligned
%-2M %-2T M
yes %2P M %2P T M - -
Right-aligned Right-aligned
%2D %2T D
None %02D %02T D
Day Left-aligned Left-aligned
%-2D %-2T D
yes %2P D %2P T D - -
Right-aligned Right-aligned
%2h %2T h
None %02h %02T h
Hour Left-aligned Left-aligned
%-2h %-2T h
yes %2P h %2P T h - -
Right-aligned Right-aligned
%2m %2T m
None %02m %02T m
Minute Left-aligned Left-aligned
%-2m %-2T m
yes %2P m %2P T m - -
Right-aligned
%2s
Second None %02s
Left-aligned
%-2s
Right-aligned Right-aligned
%3X %3T X
None %03X %03T X
365 days Left-aligned Left-aligned
%-3X %-3T X
yes %3P X %3P T X - -
None %1B %1T B - -
Day of week
yes %1P B %1P T B -
Week yes %2P W %2P T W - -
Time zone yes %P S - -

I/O encoded None %1R - -

character yes %1P R - - -

is the encoding No. (0 to 9) and is the expiration No. (0 to 9).

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-29

 Command Details

• To set a counter, send the following in ASCII format.

Encoding
Type Zero suppression Padding Alignment
yes None

None - - %0 P C C %0 C C
Auto - %P C C %C C
Serial counter
yes Right-aligned % P C C % C C
Specify Digits

1
Left-aligned %- P C C %- C C

● is the encoding No. (0 to 9), ■ is the counter No. (0 to 9, A to J), and ▲ is the No. of digits (1 to 10).

• To set a link, send the following in ASCII format.

Communication Interface

Reference Reference parameters Setting code

GS1 DataBar %H< 1>

GS1 DataBar & CC-A
CC-A %H< 2>
Add check digit %H< C>
Barcode Add start-stop character %H< *>
Add check digit & Add start-stop character %H< C*>
Entire encoded string %H< 00A>
GS1 DataMatrix Specify AI number (AI added) %H< A>
Specify AI number (AI not added) %H< >
Other blocks - %H< >

is the block No. (000 to 255) and is the referenced AI number (Nth AI).
The range specification options add the following before the “>” symbol.
“SxxxLxxx”: S is set with the start position, L is set with the number of reference characters, and XXX is set with the number of characters
(001 to 510).

• Send the following by ASCII when a control code is set to the barcode or 2D code.

Control code Setting code Control code Setting code Control code Setting code

NUL %000A CR %013A SUB %026A

SOH %001A SO %014A ESC %027A
STX %002A SI %015A FS %028A
ETX %003A DLE %016A GS %029A
EOT %004A DC1 %017A RS %030A
ENQ %005A DC2 %018A US %031A
ACK %006A DC3 %019A DEL %127A
BEL %007A DC4 %020A FNC1 %901A
BS %008A NAK %021A FNC2 %902A
HT %009A SYN %022A FNC3 %903A
LF %010A ETB %023A FNC4 %904A
VT %011A CAN %024A
FF %012A EM %025A

1-30 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(4) Font setting (Set/Request)

Command CharacterFont 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the font No., line type, line width, line count, and overlap rate used in a string.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterFont=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterFont[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR] 1
Font No.

Communication Interface
-1: Quick
00: Standard
A:00 to 11 2 bytes 01: Small
02 to 11: User font
* Quick: Available on only MD-U1000 series
* Default value “0”

Line type
0: Single
B: 0 to 2 1 byte 1: Multiple
2: Wobble
* Default value “0”

C: Depends on the area size Thickness (mm)

Parameter Normal : 0.010 to 5.000 * B: Fixed value of “0.1” when 0
5 bytes
Other model : “Line width” of “Model-Specific * Default value “Normal: 0.2”/”Wide:
Input Value List” (Page 1-80) 0.3”/”Small: 0.1”

Auto number of lines

0: Any value
D:0/1 1 byte 1: Auto
* B: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Number of multiples (lines)

E:002 to 100 3 bytes * D: Fixed value of “2” when 1
* Default value “4”

Overlap rate (%)

F: 75.0 to 98.0 4 bytes * B: Fixed value of “80” when other than 2
* Default value “80”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”. Cannot be sent to the block of TrueTypeFont.
• Multiple and Wobble thicknesses can be set to a ratio of up to x0.2 compared to the smaller character height or width.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-31

 Command Details

(5) Character size (Set/Request)

Command CharacterSize 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the height, width, character layout, space, and full width/full height of a string.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterSize=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterSize[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Communication Interface

Normal : 000.100 to 125.000 Height (mm)

7 bytes
Other model : “Height/Width” of “Model-Specific * Default value “3”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : 000.100 to 125.000 Character width (mm)
7 bytes
Other model : “Height/Width” of “Model-Specific * Default value “2”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

Character Layout
0: Character space
C:0/2/3 1 byte
1: Distribute
3: Character pitch
Parameter
D: Depends on the area size
Normal : 000.000 to 180.000 Space (mm)
7 bytes
Other model : “Character space” of “Model- * Default value “0.5”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

E: Depends on the area size

Normal : 000.100 to 180.000 Full width/Full height (mm)
7 bytes
Other model : “Character full width/full height” of * Default value “7”
“Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

F: Depends on the area size

Normal : -180.000 to 0180.000 Character pitch
8 bytes
Other model : “Character pitch” of “Model-Specific * Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”.
• You can only set the character height/width ratio between x0.2 and x5.
• The character width and character spacing cannot be set when the ratio specification or proportional is enabled and when the font is a
TrueTypeFont. Also, they cannot be set when the character spacing of C is other than 0.
• C to F: Cannot be set when the character string is circle layout.
• The character pitch can be set for a TrueType font only.

(6) Logo size (Set/Request)

Command LogoSize 8 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the height and width of a logo (including hatch logo and workpiece image logo).

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,LogoSize=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,LogoSize[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Logo height (mm)
Normal : 000.002 to 125.000
7 bytes * Default value depends on the original DXF
Other model : “Logo Height/Width” of “Model-
size
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)
Parameter
B: Depends on the area size
Logo width (mm)
Normal : 000.002 to 125.000
7 bytes * Default value depends on the original DXF
Other model : “Logo Height/Width” of “Model-
size
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo/-2: Workpiece image/-1: Logo”.
• When the aspect ratio is maintained, the logo height is set automatically based on the value of the logo width.

1-32 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(7) String proportional setting (Set/Request)

Command CharacterProportional 21 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the enable/disable of the proportional function and the minimum character width of a string.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterProportional=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterProportional[CR]

RX,OK,A,B[CR] 1
Proportional setting

Communication Interface
0: Disabled
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
Parameter * Default value “0”

Minimum character width (%)

B: 000 to 100 3 bytes * A: Fixed value of “20” when 0
* Default value “20”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/02: Arc clockwise/03: Arc
counterclockwise”.

(8) String ratio setting (Set/Request)

Command CharacterRatio 14 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the enable/disable of string ratio setting and the width and space ratios of a string.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterRatio=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CharacterRatio[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Ratio setting
0: Disabled
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

Character width ratio (%)

* A: Fixed value of “20” when 0
B: 020.00 to 500.00 6 bytes
Parameter * Default value “66.67” if the character type is
system font and “100” if it is a TrueType font

Character space ratio (%)

C: Depends on the block type
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
Horizontal characters/Vertical characters: -100.00 to
7 bytes * Default value “25” when the system font,
1000.00
circle layout, and character layout are
Arc (counter) clockwise string: 0000.00 to 1000.00
“character spacing,” and “0” for others.

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”.
• The ratio specification cannot be set in the case of TrueTypeFont.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-33

 Command Details

(9) Arc string character layout setting (Set/Request)

Command ArcCharacter 12 bytes
Description Sets/request the character layout, radius, space, character angle space, and open angle of an arc string.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ArcCharacter=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ArcCharacter[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]

Arc character layout

Communication Interface

0: Character space
A:0 to 2 1 bytes 1: Angular interval
2: Distribute angle
* Default value “0”

Arc radius (mm)

B: 000.001 to 9999.99 7 bytes
* Default value “20”

C: Depends on the area size

Arc character space (mm)
Parameter Normal : 000.000 to 180.000
7 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when other than 0
Other model : “Arc character space” of “Model-
* Default value “0.5”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

Arc character angle space (°)

D: 000.000 to 359.999 7 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when other than 1
* Default value “10”

Arc open angle (°)

E:000.000 to 359.999 7 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when other than 2
* Default value “120”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “02: Arc clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise”.

1-34 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(10) Barcode/2D code setting (Set/Request)

Command CodeSetting 11 bytes
Sets/Requests the format, check digit setting, DataMatrix 06 macro setting, and QR Code error correction rate of a
Description
barcode/2D code.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeSetting=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeSetting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

Communication Interface
Format
0: Normal
A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Black/White inversion
2: Overprinting
* Default value “0”

Check Digit
0: None
1: Yes
B:0/1 1 byte
* Fixed value of “0” when the code type is
other than CODE39/ITF/NW7
* Default value “0”

DataMatrix 06 macro
0: None
Parameter 1: Add
C:0/1 1 byte
* Fixed value of “0” when the code type is
other than DataMatrix ECC200
* Default value “0”

QR Code error correction rate

0: L (7%)
1: M(15%)
2: Q(25%)
3: H (30%)
D:0/1/2/3 1 byte
* Fixed value of “0” when the code type is
other than QR Model 1/2 or Micro QR
* Default value “3” when the code type is QR
model 1/2, “2” when micro QR, and “0” for
others.

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.
• If “Overprinting” is selected as the format, overprinting No.0 will be assigned to “Base” and overprinting No.1 will be assigned to “Code”,
respectively. Then, set the overprinting marking parameters (MultiPassMarkingParameter), overprinting pattern (MultiPassPattern), and
overprinting fill parameters (MultiPassFillParameters).
• If you set the format to “Normal or Black/White Inversion”, the parameters in all overprinting No. will be initialized.
• The format of “2: Overprinting” cannot be selected in the case of JAN/EAN/UPC/GS1 DataBar.
• The error correction proportion of a QR code cannot be set to H (30%) in the case of the micro QR.

(11) Barcode size (Set/Request)

Command BarcodeSize 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the height, narrow bar, bar ratio, and quiet zone width of a barcode.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BarcodeSize=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BarcodeSize[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Normal : 000.200 to 125.000 Barcode height (mm)
7 bytes
Other model : “Barcode height” of “Model-Specific * Default value “5”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

Narrow bar (mm)

Parameter B: 00.010 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0.2”

Bar ratio (x)

C: 002.0 to 004.0 5 bytes
* Default value “2.5”

Quiet zone (x)

D: 01 to 99 2 bytes
* Default value “10”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“01: CODE39/02: ITF/03: 2of5/04: NW7/05: JAN/06: CODE128/18: CODE93”.
• The bar ratio cannot be set in the case of JAN/EAN/UPC/CODE93/CODE128.
• The quiet zone cannot be set when the format is “Normal.”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-35

 Command Details

(12) GS1 DataBar size (Set/Request)

Command GS1DataBarSize 14 bytes
Sets/Requests the module width, linear code height, separator height, 2D module height, guard width, and quiet zone
Description
width of GS1 DataBar.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,GS1DataBarSize=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,GS1DataBarSize[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Communication Interface

Module width (mm)

A:00.010 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value 0.25

B: Depends on the area size Linear code height (mm)

Normal : 000.200 to 125.000 * Default value “8.25” for GS1 DataBar
7 bytes
Other model : “Linear code height” of “Model- Truncated, “3” for GS1 DataBar Stacked
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80) and “2.5” for GS1 DataBar Limited

Separator height (mm)

* Fixed value of “0.25” when the barcode
C: 0.010 to 5.000 5 bytes type is GS1 DataBar (Truncated) and GS1
Parameter DataBar Limited.
* Default value “0.25”

2D module height (mm)

* Fixed value of “0.5” when the barcode type
D: 0.010 to 5.000 5 bytes
is other than CC-A
* Default value “0.5”

Guard (x)
E:00 to 10 2 bytes
* Default value “0”

Quiet zone (x)

F: 01 to 50 2 bytes
* Default value “1”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of “11
to 16: GS1 DataBar”.
• The guard can be set when the format is “Black/white inversion.”
• The quiet zone can be set when CC-A and the format is “Black/white inversion.”

(13) DataMatrix size (Set/Request)

Command DataMatrixSize 14 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the symbol size, cell size, and quiet zone width of DataMatrix.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixSize=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,DataMatrixSize[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Symbol size
0001:10x10 0002:12x12 0003:14x14
0004:16x16 0005:18x18 0006:20x20
0007:22x22 0008:24x24 0009:26x26
0010:32x32 0011:36x36 0012:40x40
A:0001 to 0030 4 bytes 0013:44x44 0014:48x48 0015:8x18
0016:8x32 0017:12x16 0018:12x36
Parameter 0019:16x36 0020:16x48 0021:52x52
0022:64x64 0023:72x72 0024:80x80
0025:88x88 0026:96x96 0027:104x104
0028:120x120 0029:132x132 0030:144x144
Cell size (mm)
B: 00.010 to 05.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0.2”

Quiet zone (x)

C: 01 to 05 2 bytes
* Default value “1”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“10: DataMatrix, 17: GS1 DataMatrix”.
• The quiet zone cannot be set when the format is “Normal.”

1-36 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(14) QR Code size (Set/Request)

Command QRCodeSize 10 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the version, cell size, and quiet zone width of QR Code.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeSize=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,QRCodeSize[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR] 1
Version

Communication Interface
1: 1/M1 2: 2/M2 3: 3/M3
4: 4/M4 5: 5/M5 6: -/M6
7: -/M7 8: -/M8 9: -/M9
10: -/M10 11: -/M11 12: -/M12
13: -/M13 14: -/M14 15: -/M15
16: -/M16 17: -/M17 18: -/M18
A:0001 to 0030 4 bytes
19: -/M19 20: -/M20 21: -/M21
22: -/M22 23: -/M32 24: -/M24
25: -/M25 26: -/M26 27: -/M27
28: -/M28 29: -/M29 30: -/M30
Parameter * Default value “0”
* The input range for Model 1 is “0 to 14”
* The input range for Micro QR is “0 to 4”

Cell size (mm)

B: 00.010 to 05.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0.2”

Mode Auto
0: Disabled
C:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “1”

Quiet zone (x)

D: 01 to 05 2 bytes * Default value “4” for QR Code Model 1/2, “2”
for Micro QR Code

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code” AND barcode type (CodeType) of
“07: QR Model 1/08: QR Model 2/09: Micro QR”.
• The mode AUTO cannot be set in the case of the micro QR.
• The quiet zone can be set when the format is “Black/white inversion.”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-37

 Command Details

(15) Block position (Set/Request)

Command BlockPosition 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the X/Y coordinates and Z coordinate reference of the common parameters of a block.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockPosition=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockPosition[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Communication Interface

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 X coordinate (mm)

8 bytes
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 * Default value “0”
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Y coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific * Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

C: Depends on the area size and 3D shape type

• The 3D shape is XY plane
Normal/Wide : -021.000 to 0021.000
Parameter Small : -015.000 to 0015.000
• The 3D shape is slope
Normal : -083.500 to 0083.500
Wide : -186.000 to 0186.000 Z coordinate (mm)
Small : -040.000 to 0040.000 * Fixed value of “9999.999” if the common
8 bytes
• The 3D shape is cylinder, cone or sphere block marking parameters are referenced
Normal : -261.000 to 0261.000 * Default value “0”
Wide : -621.000 to 0621.000
Small : -115.000 to 0115.000
• The 3D shape is Z-map
Normal : -125.000 to 0125.000
Wide : -330.000 to 0330.000
Small : -050.000 to 0050.000

1-38 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(16) Block layout (Set/Request)

Command BlockLayout 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the reference point, block angle, start angle, and character angle of a block.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockLayout=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,BlockLayout[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR] 1
Block reference point:

Communication Interface
0: Left
1: Right
2: Center
3: Lower left
A:0 to 8 1 bytes 4: Lower right
5: Upper left
6: Upper right
7: Top
8: Bottom
* Default value “3”

Block angle (°)

* Fixed value of “0” when the block type is arc
B: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
Parameter character
* Default value “0”

Start angle (°)

* Fixed value of “0” when the block type is
C: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes other than arc character
* Default value “90” for clockwise “-90” for
counterclockwise

Set using character angle

0: Disabled
D:0/1 1 bytes
1: Enabled
* Default value “0.”

Character angle (°)

E:-180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of other than “04: Fixed point”.

(17) Fixed point emission time (Set/Request)

Command FixedPointProcessingTime 24 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the fixed point emission time.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FixedPointProcessingTime=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FixedPointProcessingTime[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Emission time (ms)

Parameter A:00000.1 to 65000.0 7 bytes
* Default value “1”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “04: Fixed point”.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-39

 Command Details

Marking parameters
(1) Marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command MarkingParameter 16 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the laser power, scan speed, pulse frequency, spot variable, and marking count of a block.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

1 WX
Command

Response
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
Communication Interface

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingParameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]

Laser power (%)

* Fixed value of “999.9” if the common block
A:000.0 to 100.0/999.9 5 bytes
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size Scan speed (mm/s)

Normal : 00001 to 12000 * Fixed value of “99999” if the common block
5 bytes
Other model : “Scan speed” of “Model-Specific marking parameters are referenced
Input Value List” (Page 1-80) * Default value “1000”

C: Differs depending on the model Pulse frequency (kHz)

Normal : 000 to 400 * Fixed value of “999” if the common block
Parameter 3 bytes
Other model : “Pulse frequency” of “Model- marking parameters are referenced
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80) * Default value “100”

D: Depends on the area size Spot variable

Normal : -210 to 0210 * Fixed value of “9999” if the common block
4 bytes
Other model : “Spot variable” of “Model-Specific marking parameters are referenced
Input Value List” (Page 1-80) * Default value “0”

Marking count (times)

* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
E: 001 to 100/ 999 3 bytes
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “1”

1-40 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(2) Barcode/2D code pattern setting (Set/Request)

Command CodePattern 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the various pattern settings, cell marking order, and cell marking count of a barcode/2D code.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodePattern=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodePattern[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR] 1
Pattern

Communication Interface
(QR Code/DataMatrix/Bar Code)
000: -/-/Alternate
001: Pattern 1/A/Unidirectional
002: Pattern 2/B/-
003: Pattern 3/C/-
004: Pattern 4/D/-
005: Pattern 5/E/-
006: Pattern 6/F/-
007: Pattern 7/Entire pattern 1/-
A:000 to 13/254 3 bytes 008: Entire pattern 1/Entire pattern 2/-
009: Entire pattern 2/Entire pattern 3/-
010: Entire pattern 3/Entire pattern 4/-
011: Entire pattern 4/Entire pattern 5/-
012: Entire pattern 5/Entire pattern 6/-
013: Entire pattern 6/-/-
254: Individual/Individual/ -
* Default value “9” for QR, DataMatrix, “0” for
Bar Code
* Entire pattern 5/6: Available on only MD-
U1000 series

Finder
000: None
001: F1
002: F2
B: 000 to 002/255 3 bytes
255: Cell
* QR Code and B: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “1”
Parameter Alignment
000: None
001: A1
002: A2
C:000 to 002/255 3 bytes
255: Cell
* DataMatrix and C: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “1”

Cell
(QR Code/DataMatrix)
000: None/None
001: M1/C1
002: M2/C2
003: M3/C3
D: 000 to 008 3 bytes
004: M4/C4
005: M5/C5
006: M6/C6
007: M7/C7
008: M8/C8
* Default value “1”

Cell marking order

0: None
1: Continuous
E:000 to 003 3 bytes
2: Skip 1 cell
3: Skip 2 cell
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 8 to 11

Cell marking count (times)

F: 001 to 100 3 bytes * A: Fixed value of “1” when 8 to 11
* Default value “1”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “B: 0/255.”
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “C: 0/255.”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-41

 Command Details

(3) Hatch logo pattern setting (Set/Request)

Command HatchPattern 12 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the fill type, pattern, fill direction, start position, fill angle, and fill cross angle of a hatch logo.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchPattern=A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchPattern[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]

Fill Type
Communication Interface

0: Boundary + Fill
A:0 to 2 1 bytes 1: Fill
2: Boundary
* Default value “0”

Pattern
0: Slant
2: Cross
B: 0 to 3 1 byte
3: Contour
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 2
* Default value “0”

Slant/Cross direction
0: Right to Left
1: Left to Right
2: Left to right, Right to left
3: Right to left, Left to right
C: 0 to 5 1 byte
4: Left to right, Right to left (High Speed)
5: Right to left, Left to right (High Speed)
* Fixed value of “2” when A is 0 or B is 2
* Default value “2”
Parameter * 4/5: Available on only MD-U1000 series

Contour direction
0: Clockwise
1: Counterclockwise
D: 0 to 3 1 byte 2: Clockwise to Counterclockwise
3: Counterclockwise to Clockwise
* Fixed value of “0” when A is 2 or B is 0/1
* Default value “0”

Contour drawing start position

0: Inside
E: 0/1 1 byte 1: Outside
* Fixed value of “1” when A is 2 or B is 0/1
* Default value “0”

Slant/Cross fill angle (°)

F: 000 to 359 3 bytes * Fixed value of “0” when A is 0 or B is 2
* Default value “0”

Cross angle (°)

G: 000 to 359 3 bytes * Fixed value of “0” when A is 2 or B is 0/2
* Default value “0”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo”.

1-42 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(4) TrueType font pattern setting (Set/Request)

Command TTFPattern 10 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the fill type, pattern, fill direction, fill angle, and fill cross angle of a TrueType font.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFPattern=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFPattern[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR] 1
Fill Type

Communication Interface
0: Boundary + Fill
A:0 to 2 1 byte 1: Fill
2: Boundary
* Default value “0”

Pattern
0: Slant
B:0/2 1 byte 2: Cross
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 2
* Default value “0”

Fill direction
0: Right to Left
1: Left to Right
Parameter
2: Left to right, Right to left
3: Right to left, Left to right
C: 0 to 5 1 byte
4: Left to right, Right to left (High Speed)
5: Right to left, Left to right (High Speed)
* A: Fixed value of “2” when 2/3
* Default value “2”
* 4/5: Available on only MD-U1000 series

Fill angle (°)

D: 000 to 359 3 byte * A: Fixed value of “0” when 2
* Default value “0”

Fill cross angle (°)

E:000 to 359 3 byte * Fixed value of “0” when A is 2 or B is 0
* Default value “90”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise” AND the font type of TrueType font.

(5) Barcode/2D code fill marking parameters (Set/Request)

Command CodeFillParameter 17 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the fill interval and shrink fill of a barcode/2D code.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeFillParameter=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CodeFillParameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

Fill interval (mm)

* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999 5 bytes marking parameters are referenced
Parameter * Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide:
0.08”/”Small: 0.03”

B: Bar Code: -5.000 to 05.000 Shrink fill (mm)

6 bytes
QR Code/DataMatrix: -2.500 to 02.500 * Default value “0”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “09: Barcode/2D Code”.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-43

 Command Details

(6) Hatch logo fill marking parameters (Set/Request)

Command HatchParameter 14 bytes
Sets/Requests the fill interval, common line interval setting reference, shrink fill, no. of skipped fill lines, overprinting
Description enable/disable, overprinting direction, overprinting count, shrink boundary, boundary fill setting, and printing order of a
hatch logo.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]

1
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,HatchParameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
Communication Interface

Fill interval (mm)

* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999 5 bytes marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide:
0.08”/”Small: 0.03”

Shrink fill (mm)

B: 00.000 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0”

Skip line count (lines)

C: 000 to 255 3 bytes
* Default value “0”

Overprinting setting
0: Disabled
D:0/1 1 bytes
1: Enabled
Parameter * Default value “0”

Overprinting direction
0: Alternate
E: 0/1 1 byte
1: Forward
* Default value “0”

Overprinting count
F: 001 to 255 3 bytes
* Default value “1”

Shrink boundary (mm)

G: 00.000 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0”

Writing Order
0: Boundary -> Fill
H:0/1 1 byte
1: Fill -> Boundary
* Default value “1”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo” and the fill type in hatch logo pattern setting
(HatchPattern) of 0: Boundary + Fill/1: Fill”.

1-44 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(7) TrueType font fill marking parameters (Set/Request)

Command TTFParameter 12 bytes
Sets/Requests the fill interval, common line interval setting reference, shrink fill, no. of skipped fill lines, overprinting
Description
enable/disable, overprinting direction, overprinting count, shrink boundary, and writing order of a TrueType font.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,TTFParameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H[CR]

Communication Interface
Fill interval (mm)
* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999 5 bytes marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide:
0.08”/”Small: 0.03”

Shrink fill
B: 00.000 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0”

Skip line count (lines)

C: 000 to 255 3 bytes
* Default value “0.”

Overprinting setting
0: Disabled
D:0/1 1 bytes
1: Enabled
Parameter * Default value “0.”

Overprinting direction
0: Alternate
E: 0/1 1 bytes
1: Forward
* Default value “0.”

Overprinting count
F: 001 to 255 3 bytes
* Default value “1”

Shrink boundary (mm)

G: 00.000 to 10.000 6 bytes
* Default value “0.”

Writing order
0: Boundary -> Fill
H:0/1 1 bytes
1: Fill -> Boundary
* Default value “1”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “00: Horizontal characters/01: Vertical characters/02: Arc
clockwise/03: Arc counterclockwise” AND the font type of TrueType AND the fill type in the TrueType font pattering setting (TTFPattern) of “0:
Boundary + Fill/1: Fill”.

(8) Photo setting (Set/Request)

Command PhotoSetting 12 byte
Description Sets/Requests the gamma correction, contrast, contrast enhancement, brightness, skip dots, and intensity of a photo.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,PhotoSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,PhotoSetting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

Gamma correction
A: 0.01 to 9.99 (High resolution only) 4 bytes
Default value “0.6”

Contrast
A: -128 to 0127 (High resolution only) 4 bytes
Default value “0”

Contrast enhancement
0: Disabled
C: 0/1 (High resolution only) 1 byte
1: Enabled
Parameter Default value “0”

Brightness
D: -128 to 0127 (High resolution only) 4 byte
Default value “0”

Skip dots
E: 1 to 8 (Grayscale only) 1 byte
Default value “1”

Intensity
F: 1 to 8 (Grayscale only) 1 byte
Default value “3”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-3: Photo”.
• It cannot be used on the MD-F3200/5200 series.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-45

 Command Details

(9) Marking flag (Set)

Command MarkingEnable 13 bytes
Description Sets the marking flag of a block.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingEnable=A,BBB---[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
None

Reset the marking flag

Communication Interface

0: Set the marking flag of all blocks to OFF

A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Set the marking flag of all blocks to ON
2: Do not change other than the specified
block
Parameter Marking flag
0: Do not Mark
1: Mark
B:0/1 1 byte
* You can change the marking flag of
continuous blocks in a batch by sending this
parameter in multiple digits.

To change the marking flag of multiple blocks in a batch, send parameter B in multiple digits.
To set block No.10 to ON, No.11 to OFF, No.12 to ON and all other blocks to OFF, send the command as described below.
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=010,MarkingEnable=0,101[CR]

(10) Individual fill marking parameters (Set/Request)

Command FillMarkingParameter 20 bytes
Description Sets/Requests to enable/disable the function and the setting values of the individual fill parameters of a hatch logo.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FillMarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,FillMarkingParameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

Individual fill parameters

A:0/1 1 byte 0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Fill line laser power (%)

* Fixed value of “999.9” if the common block
B: 000.0 to 100.0/9.999 5 byte marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
* Default value “0”

Fill line scan speed (mm/s)

C: Depends on the area size
* Fixed value of “99999” if the common block
Normal : 00001 to 12000
5 bytes marking parameters are referenced
Other model : “Scan speed” of “Model-Specific
* A: Fixed value of “1000” when 1
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)
* Default value “1000”

Parameter Fill line pulse frequency (kHz)

D: Differs depending on the model
* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
Normal : 000 to 400
3 bytes marking parameters are referenced
Other model : “Pulse frequency” of “Model-
* A: Fixed value of “100” when 1
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)
* Default value “100”

Fill spot variable

E: Depends on the area size
* Fixed value of “9999” if the common block
Normal : -210 to 0210
4 bytes marking parameters are referenced
Other model : “Spot variable” of “Model-Specific
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)
* Default value “0”

Fill line marking count (times)

* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
F: 001 to 100/999 3 bytes marking parameters are referenced
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 1
* Default value “1”

This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of “-4: Hatch logo” or TrueTypeFont.

1-46 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(11) Jump Speed (Set/Request)

Command JumpSpeed 9 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the jump speed.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,JumpSpeed=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,JumpSpeed[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR] 1
Jump speed

Communication Interface
0: Top Speed
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: High Speed
2: Medium Speed
* Default value “0”

This command is enabled when the quality level (MarkingQuality) is not “05: Customize”.

(12) Nudge marking quality setting (Set/Request)

Command MarkingQuality 14 bytes
Sets/Requests the skip cross, common skip cross setting reference, quality level, common quality level setting
Description
reference, and marking start wait time of a block.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingQuality=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,MarkingQuality[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Skip cross (mm)

* Fixed value of “99.999” if the common block
A:00.000 to 10.000/99.999 6 bytes
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”

Quality Level
00: Top speed
01: Speed priority
02: Standard
Parameter 03: High quality
B: 00 to 06/99 2 bytes 04: Top quality
05: Customize
06: Top speed
* Fixed value of “99” if the common block
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “02”

Wait time for start marking (ms)

C: 00000.0 to 65000.0 7 bytes
* Default value “0”

The skip cross can be set only for the character strings except TrueTypeFont.

(13) Approach (Set/Request)

Command Approach 8 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the block approach.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,Approach=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,Approach[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

A: Normal,Wide:0.000 to 5.000、Small:0.000 to Approach (mm)

Parameter 5 bytes
2.500 * Default value “0.500”

This command is enabled when the quality level (MarkingQuality) is “05: Customize”.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-47

 Command Details

(14) Space approach (Set/Request)

Command SpaceApproach 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the space approach.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,SpaceApproach=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,SpaceApproach[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

Space approach (mm)

Communication Interface

Parameter A:0.000 to 5.000 5 bytes

* Default value “0.250”

This command is enabled when the quality level (MarkingQuality) is “05: Customize”.

(15) Curve correction (Set/Request)

Command CurveCorrection 15 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the curve correction.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CurveCorrection=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,CurveCorrection[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Curve correction
0: Disabled
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “1”

1-48 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

Code overprinting parameters

(1) Barcode/2D code overprinting marking parameters (Set/Request)
Command MultiPassMarkingParameter 25 bytes
Specifies the overprinting order in the barcode/2D code overprinting setting and changes/requests the marking
Description
parameters.

Target

WX
Command
JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassMarkingParameter=A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR] 1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Communication Interface
Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassMarkingParameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G[CR]

Format
0: Code
A:0 to 2 1 byte 1: Code (Black/white inversion)
2: Base
* Default value “2”

Laser power (%)

* Fixed value of “999.9” if the common block
B: 000.0 to 100.0/999.9 5 bytes
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “0”

C: Depends on the area size Scan speed (mm/s)

Normal : 00001 to 12000 * Fixed value of “99999” if the common block
5 bytes
Other model : “Scan speed” of “Model-Specific marking parameters are referenced
Input Value List” (Page 1-80) * Default value “1000”

D: Differs depending on the model Pulse frequency (kHz)

Parameter Normal : 000 to 400 * Fixed value of “999” if the common block
3 bytes
Other model : “Pulse frequency” of “Model- marking parameters are referenced
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80) * Default value “100”

E: Depends on the area size Spot variable

Normal : -210 to 0210 * Fixed value of “9999.9” if the common block
4 bytes
Other model : “Spot variable” of “Model-Specific marking parameters are referenced
Input Value List” (Page 1-80) * Default value “0”

Marking count (times)

* Fixed value of “999” if the common block
F: 001 to 100/999 3 bytes
marking parameters are referenced
* Default value “1”

G: Depends on the area size

Normal : 00.000 to 42.000 Deep dig amount (mm)
6 bytes
Other model : “Deep dig amount” of “Model- * Default value “0”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

• This command can be sent when the type of block (BlockType) is “09: Barcode/2D code” and the format setting of the barcode or 2D code
related settings (CodeSetting) is the block No. of “2: Overprinting.”
• The overprinting can be added when insetting No. is specified so that it becomes consecutive number at OLP.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-49

 Command Details

(2) Barcode/2D code overprinting pattern setting (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassPattern 16 bytes
Specifies the overprinting order in the barcode/2D code overprinting settings and changes/requests the various pattern
Description
settings, cell marking order, and cell marking count.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassPattern=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassPattern[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
Communication Interface

Pattern
(QR Code/DataMatrix/2D Code base/Bar Code/
Bar Code base)
000: -/-/-/Alternate/-
001: Pattern 1/A/B1/Unidirectional/Alternate
002: Pattern 2/B/B2/-/Unidirectional
003: Pattern 3/C/B3/-/Alternate (Horiz.)
004: Pattern 4/D/B4/-/Unidirectional (Horiz.)
005: Pattern 5/E/B5/-/-
006: Pattern 6/F/B6/-/-
007: Pattern 7/Entire pattern 1/B7/-/-
A:000 to 13/254 3 bytes
008: Entire pattern 1/Entire pattern 2/B8/-/-
009: Entire pattern 2/Entire pattern 3/B9/-/-
010: Entire pattern 3/Entire pattern 4/-/-/-
011: Entire pattern 4/Entire pattern 5/-/-/-
012: Entire pattern 5/Entire pattern 6/-/-/-
013: Entire pattern 6/-/-/-/-
254: Individual/Individual/-/-/-
* Default value “0” for Bar Code, “9” for 2D
Code
* B7/8/9, Entire pattern 5/6: Available on only
MD-U1000 series

Finder
000: None
001: F1
002: F2
B: 000 to 002/255 3 bytes
255: =Cell
* QR Code and B: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
Parameter * Default value “0”

Alignment
000: None
001: A1
002: A2
C:000 to 002/255 3 bytes
255: =Cell
* DataMatrix and C: Fixed value of “0” when
other than 0 to 2
* Default value “0”

Cell (QR Code/DataMatrix)

000: None/None
001: M1/C1
002: M2/C2
003: M3/C3
D: 000 to 008 3 bytes 004: M4/C4
005: M5/C5
006: M6/C6
007: M7/C7
008: M8/C8
* Default value “0”

Cell marking order

001: Continuous
E:001 to 003 3 bytes 002: Skip 1 cell
003: Skip 2 cell
* A: Fixed value of “1” when 8 to 11

Cell marking count (times)

F: 001 to 100 3 bytes * A: Fixed value of “1” when 8 to 11
* Default value “1”

• This command can be sent when the type of block (BlockType) is “09: Barcode/2D code” and the format setting of the barcode or 2D code
related settings (CodeSetting) is the block No. of “2: Overprinting.”
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “B: 0/255”.
• “D: 0” cannot be set when “C: 0/255”.

1-50 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(3) Barcode/2D code overprinting fill parameters (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassFillParameters 23 bytes
Specifies the overprinting order in the barcode/2D code overprinting setting and changes/requests the fill interval,
Description
common line interval setting, and shrink fill.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassFillParameters=A,B[CR]
WX

1
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassFillParameters[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

Communication Interface
Fill interval (mm)
* Fixed value of “9.999” if the common block marking
A:0.000 to 1.000/9.999 5 bytes
parameters are referenced
Parameter * Default value “Normal: 0.06”/”Wide: 0.08”/”Small: 0.03”

B: 2D code: -2.500 to 02.500 Shrink fill (mm)

6 bytes
Barcode: -5.000 to 05.000 * Default value “0”

This command can be sent when the type of block (BlockType) is “09: Barcode/2D code” and the format setting of the barcode or 2D code
related settings (CodeSetting) is the block No. of “2: Overprinting.”

(4) Quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassQualityLevel 21 bytes
Description In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the quality level.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000, OLP=0,MultiPassQualityLevel=A[CR]

WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0, MultiPassQualityLevel[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Quality Level
00: Top speed
01: Speed priority
02: Standard
Parameter A: 00 to 06 2 bytes 03: High quality
04: Top quality
05: Customize
06: Top speed
* Default value “02”

(5) Approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassApproach 17 bytes
Description In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the approach.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000, OLP=0,MultiPassApproach=A[CR]

WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassApproach[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

A: Normal/Wide: 0.000 to 5.000, Approach (mm)

Parameter 5 bytes
Small: 0.000 to 2.500 * Default value “0.500”

This command is enabled when the quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (MultiPassQualityLevel) is “05: Customize”.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-51

 Command Details

(6) Space approach of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassSpaceApproach 22 bytes
Description In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the space approach.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassSpaceApproach=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0,MultiPassSpaceApproach[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

Space approach (mm)

Communication Interface

Parameter A:0.000 to 5.000 5 bytes

* Default value “0.250”

This command is enabled when the quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (MultiPassQualityLevel) is “05: Customize”.

(7) Curve correction of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassCurveCorrection 24 bytes
Description In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the curve correction.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassCurveCorrection=A[CR]

WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassCurveCorrection[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Curve correction
0: Disabled
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

(8) Jump speed of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)

Command MultiPassJumpSpeed 18 bytes
Description In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the jump speed.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassJumpSpeed=A[CR]

WX
Response WX,OKA[CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassJumpSpeedA[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Jump speed
0: Top Speed
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: High Speed
2: Medium Speed
* Default value “0”

This command is enabled when the quality level of barcode/2D code overprinting (MultiPassQualityLevel) is not “05: Customize”.

(9) Wait time for start marking of barcode/2D code overprinting (Set/Request)
Command MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime 30 bytes
In barcode/2D code overprinting settings, specify the overprinting order and change/request the wait time for start
Description
marking.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255,OLP=0 to 9

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime=A[CR]

WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,OLP=0 to 9,MultiPassBlockMarkingDelayTime[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Wait time for start marking (ms)

Parameter A:00000.0 to 65000.0 7 bytes
* Default value “0”

1-52 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

3D shape setting
(1) 3D shape setting (Set/Request)
Command 3DShape 7 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the 3D shape setting enable/disable and the 3D shape No. to be inserted.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

WX
Command

Response
WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DShape=A,B[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
1

Communication Interface
Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DShape[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

3D shape setting
0: XY Plane
A:0/1 1 byte
1: 3D Shape
Parameter * Default value “0”

3D shape No.
B: 000 to 255 3 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the block type (BlockType) of other than “04: Fixed point”.
• The tilt correction target block of the Z tracking cannot be set for a target. When the block is set to the target, the communication error
S083 “3D information incorrect setting error” will occur.

(2) 3D shape type (Set/Request)

Command 3DShapeType 11 bytes
Description Specifies the 3D shape No. and creates a new or requests a 3D shape type.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapeType=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapeType[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

3D Shape
-01: Z map
000: Slope
001: Inside cylinder
002: Outside cylinder
Parameter A: -01/000 to 006/020 3 bytes 003: Inside cone
004: Outside cone
005: Inside hemisphere
006: Outside hemisphere
020: XY Plane
* Default value “20”

• You cannot change a 3D shape No. for which a 3D shape has already been set. The 3D shape setting information is initialized when the
block associated with the 3D shape No. is removed.
• Therefore, associate the block using the 3DShape command following the 3DShapeType.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-53

 Command Details

(3) 3D shape position (Set/Request)

Command 3DShapePosition 15 bytes
Description Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the X/Y/X coordinates and X/Y/Z rotation angles.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapePosition=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,3DShapePosition[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

A: Depends on the area size and block type

Communication Interface

• The block type is other than arc character

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
X coordinate (mm)
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Small: -025.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99

B: Depends on the area size, block type, and 3D shape type

• The block type is other than arc character and 3D shape is
other than cone
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific Input
Value List” (Page 1-80)
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D shape is
Y coordinate (mm)
cone 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Normal : 0000.000 to 0062.500
Wide : 0000.000 to 0165.000
Small : 0000.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99
“Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page
Parameter 1-80)

C: Depends on the area size and 3D shape type

• The 3D shape is cylinder, cone or sphere
Normal : -261.000 to 0261.000
Wide : -621.000 to 0621.000
Small : -115.000 to 0115.000
• The 3D shape is slope
Z coordinate (mm)
Normal : -083.500 to 0083.500 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
Wide : -186.000 to 0186.000
Small : -040.000 to 0040.000
• The 3D shape is Z-map
Normal : -125.000 to 0125.000
Wide : -330.000 to 0330.000
Small : -050.000 to 0050.000

X rotation angle (°)

D: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

Y rotation angle (°)

E:-180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

Z rotation angle (°)

F: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: 3D Shapes”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).

1-54 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(4) Diameter of cylinder shape (Set/Request)

Command CylinderDiameter 16 bytes
Description Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the diameter of a cylinder shape.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,CylinderDiameter=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,CylinderDiameter[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR] 1
A: Depends on the area size

Communication Interface
Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000 Cylinder diameter (mm)
Parameter 8 bytes
Other model : “Cylinder diameter” of “Model- * Default value “Normal/Wide: 40”/”Small: 20”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: 3D Shapes” AND the 3D shape type
(3DShapeType) of “01/02: Cylinder”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).

(5) Cone shape size setting (Set/Request)

Command ConeSize 8 bytes
Description Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the various sizes of a cone shape.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,ConeSize=A,B,C,D,E[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,ConeSize[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000 Bottom diameter (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “Bottom diameter of cone” of * Default value “Normal/Wide: 40”/”Small: 20”
“Model-Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

Set with bus angle

0: Disabled
B:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

C: Depends on the area size

Parameter
Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000 Top diameter (mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “Top diameter of cone” of “Model- * Default value “Normal/Wide: 20”/”Small: 10”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : 000.100 to 125.000 Height (mm)
7 bytes
Other model : “Cone height” of “Model-Specific * Default value “Normal/Wide: 20”/”Small: 10”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

Bus angle (°)

E:-85.000 to 085.000 7 bytes
* Default value “0”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: : 3D shape AND the 3D shape type (3DShapeType)
of “3/4: Cone”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).
• The bus angle cannot be set when the specification is disabled at the bus angle. The top diameter and height cannot be set when the
specification is enabled at the bus angle.

(6) Diameter of sphere shape (Set/Request)

Command SphereDiameter 14 bytes
Description Specifies the 3D shape No. and changes/requests the diameter of a sphere shape.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,3DS=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,SphereDiameter=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,3DS=000,SphereDiameter[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Normal : 0000.200 to 0480.000 Diameter (mm)
Parameter 8 bytes
Other model : “Sphere diameter” of “Model- * Default value “20”
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “1: 3D Shapes” AND the 3D shape type
(3DShapeType) of “05/06: Sphere”.
• Specify the target specifier 3DS based on the 3D shape No. of the 3D shape setting (3DShape).

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-55

 Command Details

(7) Position on 3D shape (Set/Request)

Command 3DSurfacePosition 17 bytes
Description Sets/Requests a specified block’sX/Y/θ positions on the 3D shape.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DSurfacePosition=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,3DSurfacePosition[CR]

RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

A: Depends on the area size and block type

Communication Interface

• The block type is other than arc character

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
X coordinate (mm) on 3D shape
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000 8 bytes
* Default value “0”
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99
“X coordinate” of “Model-Specific Input Value
List” (Page 1-80)

B: Depends on the area size, block type, and 3D

shape type
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D
Parameter shape is other than cone
Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000 Y coordinate (mm) on 3D shape
8 bytes
• The block type is other than arc character and 3D * Default value “0”
shape is cone
Normal : 0000.000 to 0062.500
Wide :0000.000 to 0165.000
Small : 0000.000 to 0025.000
• The block type is arc character
-9999.99 to 09999.99

θ angle (°) on 3D shape

C: -90.000 to 090.000 7 bytes
* Default value “0”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “01: 3D Shapes”.
• When the type of 3D shape (3DShapeType) is a cylinder or cone (001 to 004), the X coordinate on the 3D shape cannot be set.
• When the type of 3D shape (3DShapeType) is other than a cylinder or cone (001 to 004), the θ angle on the 3D shape cannot be set.

(8) Cone setting (Set/Request)

Command ConeSetting 11 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the character frame setting, layout, character angle space, and open angle of a cone.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,BLK=000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ConeSetting=A,B,C,D[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,BLK=000,ConeSetting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

Char. Frame
0: Use fixed length
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Use fixed angle
* Default value “0”

Layout
1: Angular interval
B:1 to 3 1 byte 2: Distribute angle
Parameter 3: Character pitch
* Default value “1”

Character angle space (°)

C: 000.000 to 180.000 7 bytes * B: Fixed value of “10” when 2/3
* Default value “10”

Open angle (°)

D: 000.000 to 180.000 7 bytes B: Fixed value of “120” when 1/3
* Default value “120”

• This command can be sent to a block No. having the 3D shape setting (3DShape) of “01: 3D Shapes” AND the 3D shape type
(3DShapeType) of “3/4: Cone”.
• B: 3 (Character Pitch) can be set only in the case of TrueTypeFont.

1-56 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

Work flow
(1) Enable/disable the XY tracking settings (Set/Request)
Command XYTrackingEnable 16 bytes
Description Sets/Requests to enable/disable the XY tracking settings.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999, TRK = 000 to 007

WX
Command

Response
WX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTrackingEnable=A

WX,OK
1

Communication Interface
Command RX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTrackingEnable
RX
Response RX,OK,A

XY tracking
0: Disabled
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

When the non-existing XY tracking setting No. in TRK is specified, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.

(2) Enable/disable the Z tracking settings (Set/Request)

Command ZTrackingEnable 15 bytes
Description Sets/Requests to enable/disable the Z tracking settings.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999, TRK = 000 to 255

Command WX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,ZTrackingEnable=A
WX
Response WX,OK

Command RX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,ZTrackingEnable
RX
Response RX,OK,A

Z tracking
0: Disabled
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

When the non-existing Z tracking setting No. in TRK is specified, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.

(3) Set/Request the calibration of the Z tracking

Command ZTrackingCalibration 20 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the calibration of the Z tracking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,ZTrackingCalibration=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,ZTrackingCalibration[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Correction before marking

0: Do not correct
A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Correct (normal)
2: Correct (high accuracy)
* Default value “0”

Correction after marking

0: Do not correct
Parameter B:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Correct (normal)
2: Correct (high accuracy)
* Default value “1”

Operation at temperature change

0: Do nothing
C:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Calibrate automatically
2: Generate warning
* Default value “0”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-57

 Command Details

(4) Set/Request the warning threshold of the XY tracking

Command XYTrackingCorrectionThreshold 29 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the warning threshold of the XY tracking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999, TRK = 000 to 007

Command WX,JOB=0000,TRK=000,XYTracking=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,XYTracking=[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:01~99 2 bytes Correlation value

Communication Interface

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(5) Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection before marking

Command WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable 30 bytes
Description Sets/Requests to enable/disable the lens inspection before marking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingEnable[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Lens inspection before marking

Parameter A:0/1 1 byte 0: Do not conduct
1: Conduct

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(6) Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection before marking
Command WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarmThreshold 38 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the warning threshold of the lens inspection before marking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarmThreshold=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingAlarmThreshold[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Warning threshold of the lens inspection

Parameter A: 0 to 100 3 bytes before marking
* Warning disabled at “0”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(7) Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection before marking

Command WindowCheckBeforeMarkingSensitivity 35 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the sensitivity of the lens inspection before marking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingSensitivity=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckBeforeMarkingSensitivity[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Lens inspection sensitivity before marking

0: Standard
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Medium sensitivity
2: High sensitivity
* Default value “0”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

1-58 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(8) Set/Request to enable/disable the lens inspection after marking

Command WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable 29 bytes
Description Sets/Requests to enable/disable the lens inspection after marking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingEnable[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR] 1
Lens inspection after marking

Communication Interface
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte 0: Do not conduct
1: Conduct

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(9) Set/Request the warning threshold of the lens inspection after marking
Command WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarmThreshold 37 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the warning threshold of the lens inspection after marking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarmThreshold=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingAlarmThreshold[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Warning threshold of the lens inspection after

Parameter A: 0 to 100 3 bytes marking
* Warning disabled at “0”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(10) Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection after marking

Command WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity 34 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the sensitivity of the lens inspection after marking.

Target JOB = 0 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,WindowCheckAfterMarkingSensitivity[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Lens inspection sensitivity after marking

0: Standard
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Medium sensitivity
2: High sensitivity
* Default value “0”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-59

 Command Details

(11) Marking confirmation function (Set/Request)

Command MarkingConfirmationSetting 26 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the enable/disable of the marking confirmation function and the various settings.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,MarkingConfirmationSetting=A,B,C,D,E
WX
Response WX,OK

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,MarkingConfirmationSetting

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E

Marking confirmation
Communication Interface

0: Disabled
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

Sensitivity setting
0: Auto
B:0/1 1 byte
1: Any value
* Default value “0”
Parameter
Sensitivity
C: 000 to 100 3 bytes * G: Fixed value of “50” when 0
* Default value “50”

Error threshold
D: 000 to 100 8 bytes
* Default value “50”

Capture delay
E:0.0 to 9.9 8 bytes
* Default value “0”

• Only enabled for stationary marking.

• It can also be set when the 2D code reader function is enabled.
• Specify the reading coordinate in the “Custom Coordinate Specification” when the matrix function is used or 3D shaped block is read.

(12) 2D code quality check and various settings (Set/Request)

Command CodeReaderSetting 17 bytes
Sets/Requests the enable/disable of the 2D code quality check function when the marking is complete and the various
Description
setting values.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,CodeReaderSetting=A,B,C,D
WX
Response WX,OK

Command RX,JOB=0000,CodeReaderSetting
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D

0: Quality check disabled

A:0/1 1 byte 1: Quality check enabled
* Default value “0”

Capture delay (s)

B: 0.0 to 9.0 1 byte * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Image hold time (s)

Parameter C: 0.0 to 9.0 3 bytes
* Default value “5”

Error threshold
0: Total grade A or higher is OK.
1: Total grade B or higher is OK.
D: 0 to 4 1 byte 2: Total grade C or higher is OK.
3: Total grade D or higher is OK.
4: Total grade F or higher is OK.
* Default value “4”

• Only enabled for stationary marking.

• It can also be set when the marking verification function is enabled.
• If the 2D code reader function is not activated, an S040 “Operation Limitation Error (2D Code Reader)” will be returned.

1-60 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(13) Capturing condition of the camera function (Set/Request)

Command CameraImagingSetting 20 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the capturing condition of the camera function in the work flow.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999, FNC = 00 to 01

Command WX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraImagingSetting=A,B,C,D
WX
Response WX,OK

RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraImagingSetting

RX,OK,A,B,C,D 1
Camera zoom

Communication Interface
0: Whole wide
1: Whole standard
A: 0 to 3 1 byte
2: Coax wide
3: Coax standard
* Default value “2”

Brightness
B: -100 to 0100 4 bytes
Parameter * Default value “0”

Gamma correction value

C: 0.1 to 5.0 3 bytes
* Default value “1.0”

Lighting type
0: Internal lighting (normal)
D:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Internal lighting (halation removal)
2: External lighting
* Default value “2”

• When FNC is out of range, S100 capturing condition invalid error will occur.
• If the marking verification function is not set when FNC=00 is specified, S032 no setting error (marking verification function) will occur.
• If the 2D code reader is not set when FNC=01 is specified, S031 no setting error (2D code reader) will occur. When it is non-activation,
S040 operation limitation error (2D code reader) will occur.
• When the Marking Builder Plus enables the function, the default of the lighting type is not “2”.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-61

 Command Details

(14) Capturing position of the camera (Set/Request)

Command CameraTargetSetting 19 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the capturing position of the camera function in the work flow.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999, FNC = 00 to 01

Command WX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraTargetSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I
WX
Response WX,OK

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,FNC=00,CameraTargetSetting

RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I

0: Block No. specification

Communication Interface

A:0/1 1 byte 1: Custom coordinate specification

* Default value “0”

Block No.
B: 000 to 255 3 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when 1
* Default value “0”

Reading X coordinate
C: Depends on the area size 8 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Reading Y coordinate
D: Depends on the area size 8 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Reading Z coordinate
E: Depends on the area size 8 bytes * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Whether to reflect the XY tracking result to the

reading coordinate
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
F: 0/1 1 byte * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
the XY tracking settings associated to the
block.
Parameter * Default value “0”

The XY tracking No. to be reflected to the

reading coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
G: 00 to 07 2 bytes
the XY tracking settings associated to the
block.
* F: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Whether to reflect the Z tracking result to the

reading coordinate
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
H:0/1 1 byte * A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
the Z tracking settings associated to the
block.
* Default value “0”

The Z tracking No. to be reflected to the

reading coordinate
* A: Fixed value of “0” when 0
This parameter will be ignored and follow
I: 000 to 255 3 bytes
the Z tracking settings associated to the
block.
* H: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

• When FNC is out of range, S100 capturing condition invalid error will occur.
• When the marking verification function is not set if FNC=00 is specified, S032 no setting error (marking verification function) will occur.
• When the 2D code reader is not set if FNC=01 is specified, S031 no setting error (2D code reader) will occur. When the 2D code reader
has not been activated the S040 operation limitation error (2D code reader) will occur.
• If the XY tracking No. which is not set to G is specified when F=1, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.
• If the Z tracking No. which is not set to I is specified when H=1, S103 tracking No. no registration error will occur.

1-62 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

Matrix setting
(1) Matrix row & column setting (Set/Request)
Command MatrixSetting 13 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the number of rows/columns and marking direction of a matrix.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

WX
Command

Response
WX,JOB=0000,MatrixSetting=A,B,C[CR]

WX,OK [CR]
1

Communication Interface
Command RX,JOB=0000,MatrixSetting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

A:001 to 255 3 bytes Line count

B: 001 to 255 3 bytes Number of columns

Marking direction
Parameter 1: Horizontal
2: Vertical
C:1/2/4/5 1 byte
4: Horizontal (Alternate)
5: Vertical (Alternate)
* Default value “1”

(2) Matrix size setting (Set/Request)

Command MatrixSize 10 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the height, height specification method, width, and width specification method of a matrix.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,MatrixSize=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,MatrixSize[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Height specification method

0: Cell height
A:0/2/3 1 byte 2: Maximum distance
3: Matrix height
* Default value “0”

B: Depends on the area size

Height (mm)
Normal : 000.000 to 125.000
7 bytes * Default value “15” for Normal/Wide, and “5”
Other model : “Matrix Height/Width” of “Model-
for Small
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)
Parameter
Width specification method
0: Cell width
C:0/2/3 1 byte 2: Maximum distance
3: Matrix width
* Default value “0”

D: Depends on the area size

Width (mm)
Normal : 000.000 to 125.000
7 bytes * Default value “15” for Normal/Wide, and “5”
Other model : “Matrix Height/Width” of “Model-
for Small
Specific Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-63

 Command Details

(3) Matrix cell reference point (Set/Request)

Command CellReferencePoint 18 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the cell reference point of a matrix.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,CellReferencePoint=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,JOB=0000,CellReferencePoint[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

Cell base point

Communication Interface

02: Center
03: Lower left
Parameter A:2 to 6 1 bytes 04: Lower right
05: Upper left
06: Upper right
* Default value “2”

If you change the θ angle of the cell coordinates of the matrix (MatrixCell), it will rotate around this reference point.

(4) Cell individual setting (Set/Request)

Command MatrixCell 10 bytes
Specifies the matrix cell and changes/requests the marking enable/disable, X/Y/Z coordinate correction, θ angle
Description
correction and marking start wait time.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999, CEL=00001 to 65025

Command WX,JOB=0000,CEL=00001,MatrixCell=A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,CEL=00001,MatrixCell[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F[CR]

Marking flag
0: Do not Mark
A:0/1 1 byte
1: Mark
* Default value “1”

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 X coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 Default value “0”
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000

C: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Y coordinate (mm)
Parameter 8 bytes
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

D: Depends on the area size

Normal : -021.000 to 0021.000 Z coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-021.000 to 0021.000 Default value “0”
Small : -015.000 to 0015.000

θ angle (°)
E:-180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes
Default value “0”

Wait time for start marking (ms)

F: 00000.0 to 65000.0 7 bytes
* Default value “0”

1-64 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

(5) Cell marking flag (Set)

Command MatrixCellEnable 16 bytes
Description Sets the marking flag of matrix cells in binary.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999, CEL=00001 to 65025

Command WX,JOB=0000,CEL=00001,MatrixCellEnable=A,BBB---[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

RX
Command

Response
None
1
Reset the marking flag

Communication Interface
0: Set the marking flag of all cells to OFF
A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Set the marking flag of all cells to ON
2: Do not change other than the specified
cells
Parameter Marking flag
0: Do not Mark
1: Mark
B:0/1 1 byte
* You can change the marking flag of
continuous cells in a batch by sending this
parameter in multiple digits.

To change the marking flag of multiple cells in a batch, send parameter B in multiple digits.
To set cell No.10 to ON, No.11 to OFF, No.12 to ON and all other cells to OFF, send the command as described below.
WX,JOB=0000,CEL=00010,MatrixCellEnable=0,101[CR]

(6) Matrix position setting (Set/Request)

Command MatrixPosition 14 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the reference point and X/Y coordinates of a matrix.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,MatrixPosition=A,B,C[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,MatrixPosition[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C[CR]

Base point
00: Left edge
01: Right edge
02: Center
03: Lower left
A:00 to 08 2 bytes 04: Lower right
05: Upper left
06: Upper right
07: Top
08: Bottom
Parameter * Default value “2”

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 X coordinate (mm)
8 bytes
Wide :-165.000 to 0165.000 * Default value “0”
Small : -025.000 to 0025.000

C: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Y coordinate (mm)
7 bytes
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific * Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

(7) Count using invalid marking cells (Set/Request)

Command InactiveCellCount 17 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the setting of whether or not to count the invalid marking cells when marking a counter in a matrix.

Target JOB = 0000 to 1999

Command WX,JOB=0000,InactiveCellCount=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,InactiveCellCount[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Count the invalid marking cells

0: Disabled
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-65

 Command Details

Group/Counter setting
(1) Group setting (Set/Request)
Command GroupOffset 11 bytes
Specifies the group and changes/requests the X/Y coordinate correction, θ angle correction, and marking enable/
Description
disable setting.

1 Target

WX
Command
JOB=0000 to 1999,GRP=000 to 255

WX,JOB=0000,GRP=000,GroupOffset=A,B,C,D[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Communication Interface

Command RX,JOB=0000,GRP=000,GroupOffset[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D[CR]

A: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Shift X(mm)
8 bytes
Other model : “X coordinate” of “Model-Specific * Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

B: Depends on the area size

Normal : -062.500 to 0062.500 Shift Y(mm)
Parameter 8 bytes
Other model : “Y coordinate” of “Model-Specific * Default value “0”
Input Value List” (Page 1-80)

C: -180.000 to 0180.000 8 bytes Shift θ(mm)

Marking flag
D:0/1 1 byte 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

You can only create new groups using Marking Builder Plus. The group number assigned when you created a group in Marking Builder Plus
will be the number of the target specifier GRP.

(2) Counter setting (Set/Request)

Command CounterSetting 14 bytes
Description Specifies the counter No. and changes/requests the various counter settings.

Target JOB=0000 to 1999,CTR=0 to 9/A to J,

Command WX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,CounterSetting=A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,JOB=0000,CTR=0,CounterSetting[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I[CR]

Step
A:00000 to 10000 5 bytes
* Default value “1”

Enabling the default value

0: Disabled
B:0/1 1 byte
1: Enabled
* Default value “0”

Default value
C: 0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes * B: Fixed value of “0” when 0
* Default value “0”

Leading value
D: 0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes
* Default value “0”

Final value
E:0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes
* Default value “4294967295”

Parameter Marking count

F: 0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes
* Default value “1”

Reset timing
0: Trigger
1: I/O
2: Power on
G: 0 to 5 1 bytes
3: When switching the job No.
4: When the date changes
5: When the shift code is switched
* Default value “1”

Count timing
0: Trigger
H:0/1 1 byte
1: Each matrix cell/group/marking
* Default value “0”

Base
I: 02 to 36 2 bytes
* Default value “10”

The target specifier JOB can be omitted if you are specifying a common counter.

1-66 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

Operation time
(1) Request the controller operating time
Command OperatingTime 13 bytes
Description Requests the operating time of the laser marker.

Target None

WX
Command

Response
None 1

Communication Interface
Command RX,OperatingTime[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:00000 to 99999 5 bytes Cumulative operation time (h)

(2) Request the laser excited

Command LaserOperatingTime 18 bytes
Description Requests the amount of time the laser has been in the excited state.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX, LaserOperatingTime[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A: 00000 to 99999 5 bytes Laser excited time (h)

(3) Request the scanner operating time

Command ScannerOperatingTime 20 bytes
Description Requests the scanner operating time

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX, ScannerOperatingTime[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A: 00000 to 99999 5 bytes Scanner operating time (h)

(4) Request the number of shutter operations

Command ShutterOperatingCount 21 bytes
Description Requests the number of shutter cycles performed.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX,ShutterOperatingCount[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes Number of shutter operations (times)

(5) Request the number of laser safety module operations

Command LaserSafetyModuleOperatingCount 31 bytes
Description Requests the number of times of times the laser safety module has been operated.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX, LaserSafetyModuleOperatingCount[CR]

RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Number of laser safety module operations

Parameter A:0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes
(times)

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-67

 Command Details

(6) Request the head temperature

Command MarkingUnitTemperature 22 bytes
Description Requests the head temperature.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

1 RX
Command

Response
RX,MarkingUnitTemperature[CR]

RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:-999.9 to 0999.9 6 bytes Head temperature (°C)

Communication Interface

(7) Request the controller temperature (°C)

Command ControllerTemperature 21 bytes
Description Requests the controller temperature.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX,ControllerTemperature[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Parameter A:-999.9 to 0999.9 6 bytes Controller temperature (°C)

(8) Request the result of laser power calibration

Command LaserPowerCalibrationResult 27 bytes
Description Requests the result of laser power calibration.

Target None

Command
WX None
Response

Command RX,LaserPowerCalibrationResult[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

Existence of calibration execution

A: 0/1 1 byte 0: None
Parameter 1: Yes

B: 000.00 to 999.99 6 bytes Calibration result (W)

(9) Cumulative marking count 1 and 2 (Set/Request)

Command CumulativeMarkingCount 22 bytes
Description Sets and request the cumulative marking count 1 and 2 .

Target None

Command WX,CumulativeMarkingCount=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,CumulativeMarkingCount[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B[CR]

A:0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes Cumulative marking count 1

Parameter
B: 0000000000 to 4294967295 10 bytes Cumulative marking count 2

1-68 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Command Details

Maintenance
(1) Request the lens inspection result
Command WindowCheckResult 17 bytes
Description Requests the result of the lens inspection maintainable as well as the date it was last performed.

Target -

WX
Command

Response
-

-
1

Communication Interface
Command RX,WindowCheckResult[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A,B,C,D,E[CR]

Whether the lens inspection has been

conducted
A:0 to 1 1 bytes
When not conducted at all: 0
When it has been conducted: 1

Year conducted
B: 0000 to 2099 4 bytes
(when not conducted at all: 0000)
Parameter
Month conducted
C: 00 to 12 2 bytes
(when not conducted at all: 00)

Day conducted
D: 00 to 31 2 bytes
(when not conducted at all: 00)

Conducted result
E:000 to 100 3 bytes
(when not conducted at all: 000)

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(2) Set/Request the sensitivity of the lens inspection

Command WindowCheckSensitivity 22 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the sensitivity of the lens inspection.

Target None

Command WX,WindowCheckSensitivity=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,WindowCheckSensitivity[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Lens inspection sensitivity at startup

0: Standard
Parameter A:0/1/2 1 byte 1: Medium sensitivity
2: High sensitivity
* Default value “0”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(3) Set/Request the lens inspection at startup

Command WindowCheckStartup 18 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the lens inspection at startup

Target None

Command WX,WindowCheckStartup=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command RX,WindowCheckStartup[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]

Lens inspection at startup

0: Do not conduct
Parameter A:0/1 1 byte
1: At every startup
* Default value “1”

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-69

 Command Details

(4) Set/Request the lens inspection alarm threshold.

Command WindowCheckAlarmThreshold 25 bytes
Description Sets/Requests the lens inspection threshold. Inspection results under this threshold will produce a warning.
Target None
Command WX,WindowCheckAlarmThreshold=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

1
Command RX,WindowCheckAlarmThreshold[CR]
RX
Response RX,OK,A[CR]
Parameter A:0~100 3 bytes Value of the lens inspection result
Communication Interface

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(5) Start the lens inspection

Command WindowCheck 11 bytes
Description Executes the lens inspection.

Target None

Command WX,WindowCheck[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK,A[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Parameter A:0~100 3 bytes Value of the lens inspection result

It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

(6) Laser power measurement

Command LaserPowerCheck 15 bytes
Measures the laser power. It takes about 10 seconds for the measurement. The shutter closes, and the marking point is
Description
not irradiated.

Target None

Command WX,LaserPowerCheck=A,B[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK,C[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

A:000.0~100.0 5 bytes Laser Power (%)

Parameter B:000/040~400 3 bytes Pulse frequency (kHz)

C:000.00~999.99 6 bytes Output power (W)

It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

(7) Delete all logging data

Command LoggingClearAllData 19 bytes
Description Deletes all logging data.

Target None

Command WX,LoggingClearAllData[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK [CR]

Command
RX None
Response

(8) Delete logging data with a specified period

Command LoggingClearData 16 bytes
Description Delete log data in the internal memory by specifying a period.

Target None

Command WX,LoggingClearData=A,B
WX
Response WX,OK

Command
RX None
Response

A:0000000000 to 9999999999 8 bytes Start date: yyyymmddhh

Parameter
B: 0000000000 to 9999999999 8 bytes End date: yyyymmddhh

1-70 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Applied Functions

Applied Functions
This chapter provides information on omission of parameters, convenient command usages, and how to create new settings using only commands.

Variable-length support
The unwanted “0” can be omitted when sending the setting values to the laser marker using the Write command.
1
„„
Omission of the command for changing the currently running job No. to “1”

Communication Interface
Command WX,JobNo=0001[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Change the job No. to variable-length

Command WX,JobNo=1[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Variable-length support complete

„„
Omission of the command for changing the position correction values
Command WX,AllPosition=-90.000,000.000,090.000,-062.500,0000.000,21.000[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Change the correction value to variable-length

Command WX,AllPosition=-90,0,90,-62.5,0,21[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Variable-length support complete

Omission of target specifiers

In the following cases, you can send the command omitting the target specifier.

If the currently running job No. is the target

You can omit the target specifier if you are specifying the currently running job No. using the “JOB” target specifier.

„„
Omission of the command for changing the title of the currently running job No.0001 to “ABC”
Command WX,JOB=0001,Title=ABC[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.

Command WX,Title=ABC[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Omission complete

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-71

 Applied Functions

If block No.000 is the target

You can omit the target specifier if you are specifying block No. 000 using the “BLK” target specifier.

„„
Omission of the command for changing the block No.000 string of the currently running job
No.0001 to “ABC”
Command WX,JOB=0001,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC[CR]

1 Response WX,OK [CR]

You can omit “BLK” for block No.000.

Communication Interface

Command WX,JOB=0001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.

Command WX,CharacterString=ABC[CR]

Response WX,OK [CR]

Omission complete

Omission of parameters
If you only wish to change some parameters using a command that have multiple parameters, you can send the command omitting those parameters
you do not need to change.

„„
Omission of the command changing only the C: Day setting value out of the six date/time setting
parameters (A: Year, B: Month, C: Day, D: Hour, E: Minute, F: Second)
To change the current time setting of 2014/12/20/11: 38: 20 to 2014/12/21/11: 38: 20

Command WX,TimeSetting=2014,12,21,11,38,20[CR]

Response WX,OK[CR]

Omit the unwanted parameters

Command WX,TimeSetting=,,21,,,[CR]

Response WX,OK【CR】

Variable-length support complete

• The omitted settings will retain their current status.

• The number of separator commas remain unchanged.

1-72 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Applied Functions

Sending of linked commands

You can link commands and send them together when sending commands to the same job No. for multiple times. Moreover, you can omit the already-
specified target specifier when linking commands. Enter a target specifier only if you wish to re-specify the target in the middle of a command.

• You cannot link and send a command targeting two or more job No.
• You cannot link and send commands that are related to “Operation/Current Value” or “Status/Controller Setup”.

For WX command 1

Communication Interface
To send the command with a linked WX command, link the command by adding “WX” only to the first command and removing “WX” from the second and
subsequent commands.

„„
Omission of the command for changing the block No.1 string of the currently running job No.0001
to “ABC”, and the block No.2 string to “123”
1. Command WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]

2. Response WX,OK[CR]

3. Command WX,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]

4. Response WX,OK[CR]

You can link the commands as they are changing blocks in the same job No.

Command WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]

Response WX,OK[CR]

You can omit the “JOB” on the end as the job No. are the same.

Command WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]

Response WX,OK[CR]

You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.

Command WX,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC,BLK=002,CharacterString=123[CR]

Response WX,OK[CR]

You can omit “0s” as they are unnecessary for the parameters.

Command WX,BLK=1,CharacterString=ABC,BLK=2,CharacterString=123[CR]

Response WX,OK[CR]

Omission complete

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-73

 Applied Functions

For RX command
To send the command with a linked RX command, link the command by adding “RX” only to the first command and removing “RX” from the second and
subsequent commands. A response is returned in the order of the requesting commands.

„„
Omission of the command for requesting the block No.1 (String: ABC) and No.2 (String: 123) string
setting of the currently running job No. 0001

1 1. Command

2. Response
RX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString[CR]

RX,OK,ABC[CR]

3. Command RX,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]
Communication Interface

4. Response RX,OK,123[CR]

You can link the commands as they are requests in the same job No.

Command RX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString,JOB=0001,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]

Response RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]

You can omit the “JOB” on the end as the job No. are the same.

Command RX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]

Response RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]

You can omit “JOB” as this is a currently running job No.

Command RX,BLK=001,CharacterString,BLK=002,CharacterString[CR]

Response RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]

You can omit “0s” as they are unnecessary for the parameters.

Command RX,BLK=1,CharacterString,BLK=2,CharacterString[CR]

Response RX,OK,ABC,123[CR]

Omission complete

Linking the communication command (WXC command)

You can link and send commands by using WXC command. Commands relating to operation can also be linked. The response will return when all the
command processing has been completed. If an error occurs on a command, commands before the error are executed but commands after the error are
not. In case of linking the commands, put “WXC,” at the beginning and link the commands with “,%,”.

„„
In case of changing a character string and then continue the marking.
Command WXC,WX,JOB=000,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC,%,WX,StartMarking[CR]

Response WXC,OK [CR]

• Up to 128 commands can be linked up.

• The request commands (RX commands) cannot be used. When the request commands are linked, no error will occur as long as
the commands are proccessed correctly, but the results of the requests do not return as a response.

„„
When an error occurs in the middle of linking commands.
The following linking command that switches the marking job to No.10 after the recent job's marking is finished. The error response below returns if there
is no marking job in No.10.

Command WXC,WX,StartMarking,%,WX,JobNo=10[CR]

Response WXC,NG,cmd_index=002,E015,No Job Error[CR]

cmd_index = No. of the linking commands on which an error occurs. 000 indicates errors occur on WXC command. 001 or the subsequent number
indicates errors occur on the linking commands.

1-74 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Applied Functions

Creating new settings

Follow the workflow below if you are creating new settings using only a communication path.

(1) Starting the creation of a new program

Declare a start of job creation on a non-registered job No. using the following command:

Command CreateJob 13 bytes

Description
Declare a start of job creation on a non-registered job No. using the following command: The specified job No. will stop
the expansion processing until “EndJob” is input. 1
Target None

Communication Interface
Command WX,CreateJob=A[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Parameter A:0000 to 1999 4 bytes Specifies the job No.

• When you declare “CreateJob” on a non-registered job No., a job will be created with all parameters in their default values.
• By declaring “CreateJob” on an existing job No., you can change the desired job parts using this job file as a base.
• If you wish to initialize the job contents every time you create a job, insert “CreateJobWithAllClear” into the command.
• The XY tracking and Z tracking settings cannot be created.

(2) Setting the required job and block information

The command required to print a single block is described below.

Contents Command Reference

Head orientation HeadDirection 1-20
Block type BlockType 1-27
String settings CharacterString 1-28
Character size CharacterSize 1-32
Block coordinate BlockPosition 1-38
Marking parameters MarkingParameter 1-40

Since all commands other than the string setting command have a default value, you can create new settings even if you omit these values.

(3) Ending the program creation

You can finish editing the job using the command described below.

Command EndJob 10 bytes

Description Declares the end of job editing.

Target None

Command WX,EndJob[CR]
WX
Response WX,OK[CR]

Command
RX None
Response

Parameter None

If the settings are in their default values and the mark data is the “ABC” string, the program can be configured using just three commands as
described below.
• WX,CreateJob=0001[CR]
• WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
• WX,EndJob[CR]

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-75

 Communication Errors

Communication Errors
Error response
An error response is returned if there is an error in the command format or data range. All error responses will have the error number “S***” and error
code on the end of the command.

1
Send WX,Command[CR]

Normal response: WX,OK[CR]

Receive
Error response: WX,NG,S***,ErrCode[CR]
Communication Interface

If the settings are in their default values and the mark data is the “ABC” string, the program can be configured using just three commands as
described below.
• WX,CreateJob=0001[CR]
• WX,JOB=0001,BLK=001,CharacterString=ABC[CR]
• WX,EndJob[CR]

Error list

Error No. Error name Remedy

Check whether the parameter is within the input range.

S000 Job Incorrect Error
Create the job again if no corrupt location can be found.
S001 Job Memory Full Error Remove unwanted jobs from the controller.
Built-in memory card full
S002 Remove unwanted logos, fonts, and Z-MAP data from the controller.
error
S003 USB flash drive full error Remove unwanted data from the USB flash drive.
USB flash drive not
S004 Perform the operation after inserting a USB flash drive.
inserted error
USB flash drive cannot Format the USB flash drive in FAT** format and try again.
S005
be recognized error Try using a different USB flash drive if the error reoccurs.
The console and/or external communication has acquired communication priority.
S006 Priority error Check if the other devices are in test marking or finder mode, check if another device is controlling the
laser marker, and perform the operation after exiting from these modes.
S008 No-File Error Perform the communication again using an existing file as the target.
S009 Busy Error Perform the operation when the laser is in the READY state.
S010 No marking block error Set the marking flag to ON for one or more target blocks (Matrix).
Logos/custom characters
S011 Reduce the number of files.
over error
S012 Illegal optimization error Reduce the line speed or adjust the character size, etc.
Scan Optimize
S013 Set the quality level of all blocks to [Customize].
unexecutable error
Job Operation During
S014 The currently running job cannot be deleted.
Execution Error
Logo/custom character
S015 First remove the job that is using the logo or custom character you wish to delete.
file operation error
Acquiring Mastership
S016 Start marking after the device has gone into READY status or controlling status.
Error
Fixed point marking
S017 Modify the job to make sure that the fixed point and 3D shape blocks are not mixed.
parameter error
Barcode/2D code illegal
S018 Please enter an encoding string.
setting error
S019 All-setup restoration error Make sure to use the backup data from the same model.
S020 Data Length Error Noise may be entering the external communication cable if the error occurs in a sporadic manner.
Job Number Unregistered
S021 Transfer the job to the controller by following the procedure below.
Error
Select [Settings] - [File Operations] in the ribbon menu, and then Transfer the job settings to the
Block No. Not Registered controller.
S022
error
S023 Status error Reset the error and try marking again.
S024 Illegal Command Error Acquire the communication history and check the parameter input range and block type.
Check if the checksum settings for the laser marker and external devices (PLC, etc.) are both ON.
If there is no problem in the above, check if the checksum calculation method of the PLC is set to
S025 Checksum Error
horizontal parity (Exclusive OR).
Noise may be entering the external communication cable if the error occurs in a sporadic manner.
Incorrect format in the communication command. Acquire the communication history and check the
command details.
S026 Format error
If a comma (,) is used in the string, change it to "%044A" (special code representing a comma) before
sending it.

1-76 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Errors

Error No. Error name Remedy

Command
S027 Invalid communication command. Acquire the communication history and check the command details.
Unrecognizable Error
Response data length
S028 Modify the request command to reduce the response data length.
error
S029 Mark data request error Send the command after marking has completed.
Group the blocks in the job using Marking Builder Plus.
Group number

1
S030 You can group blocks by following the procedure below.
unregistered error
Select and right-click on a block to open the context menu, and then select [Grouping].
No Program Error
S031 Activate the 2D code reader function in Marking Builder Plus.
(2D code reader)

Communication Interface
No Program Error
S032 (Marking confirmation Activate the marking confirmation function in Marking Builder Plus.
function)

No Program Error
S033 Activate the XY tracking or Z tracking function in Marking Builder Plus.
(3-Axis Tracking)
Operation Limitation Error
S040
(2D Code Reader)
Operation Limitation Error
S041
(3D Marking)
Delete the job that uses the inactivated function or activate the target function..
Operation Limitation Error
S042
(Z Tracking)
Operation Limitation Error
S043
(XY Tracking)
Check the following when using the high speed character edit command.
Quick change of • Check if the block you wish to change is subject to high speed string editing.
S050
character setup error • Check that the string to be sent is registered as the character type that supports high speed string
editing.
Sample Marking
S051 Commence sample marking in READY state.
Unexecutable Error
Laser inspection
S052 Commence inspection laser in READY state.
unexecutable error
Block type incorrect
S060
setting error
Recreate the job.
Block assignment
S061
incorrect setting error
Character size incorrect
S062 Modify the blocks whose character aspect ratio is greater than 1:5 or 5:1.
setting error
Character assignment
S063
incorrect setting error
Character advanced
S064
incorrect setting error
Marking condition
S065
incorrect setting error
Barcode/2D code illegal
S066
setting error
Continuous marking
S067
incorrect setting error
Movement/marking
S068 direction incorrect setting Recreate the job.
error
Job Program Incorrect
S069
Error
Matrix information
S070
incorrect setting error
Matrix cell information
S071
incorrect setting error
Character string incorrect
S072
setting error
Individual counter
S073
incorrect setting error
Reconfigure the common counter settings by following the procedure below.
Common counter
S074 You can configure by selecting [Settings] - [Common Data] in the ribbon menu, followed by [Common
incorrect setting error
Counter].
Encoding information Reconfigure the encoding setting.
S075
incorrect setting error You can configure by selecting [Settings] - [Common Data] in the ribbon menu, followed by [Encoding].
System information
S076
incorrect setting error
Font replacement Recreate the job.
S077 information incorrect
setting error

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-77

 Communication Errors

Error No. Error name Remedy

Reconfigure the character scaling settings.

Font scaling information
S078 You can configure by selecting [Settings] - [Common Data] in the ribbon menu, followed by [Character
incorrect setting error
scaling].
Logo/custom character
S080 buffer information
incorrect setting error Recreate the job.
3D information incorrect

1
S083
setting error
A job loaded on the controller is using a function that has not been activated (e.g. 2D code reader).
S084 Operation limitation error
Delete the job that is using the unactivated function, or activate the necessary function.
Communication Interface

The loaded job has been created in a higher version than that of the connected Marking Builder Plus.
S085 Data Version Error
Upgrade Marking Builder Plus to the latest version, or downgrade the version of the loaded job.
Wobble Incorrect Setting
S086 Check if the marking line width, overlap rate and scan speed settings are within range.
Error
S087 2D code reading error Modify the job so that code reading is possible in test marking, then run the job again.
Working distance Height measurement may not be possible in the following cases:
S088
measurement error • Distance measuring light cannot be detected correctly because of the surface condition of the target.
Working distance
S089 measurement limitation Measure the work distance when the laser is in the READY state.
error
S090 Registered barcode error Change the barcode verification string.
Please check the following:
Barcode/2D code link
S091 • Check if the 2D code overprinting setting is enabled for the target block.
setting error
• Check if the target overprinting No. exists.
Barcode illegal
S092 Configure it in either Marking Builder Plus or the console.
registration state error
Marking Confirmation
S093 Check if the marked data exisits within the field of view of the confirmation coordinates.
Function Error
TrueType font file size
S094 Reduce the number of TrueType font types being used.
error
S095 Model limitation error Cannot be used.
S096 Open priority error Restart the device.
File may be read-only.
S097 File Access Error
Check the file attribute and try again.
The FNC specifier of the communication command is specified other than 00 (marking confirmation
Illegal Capturing
S100 function) and 01 (2D code reader).
Condition Error
Send the command using the correct FNC specifier number.

Window maintenance
S101 Window maintenance started by a communication command was cancelled.
cancelled

Z displacement detection
S102 Z coordinate acquisition performed by communication command failed.
failure

Tracking No. Registration

S103 Review the requesting number.
Error

Tracking Result Request

S104
Error

Logging Capture Result

S105 Request the result after marking.
Request Error

Workflow Result Request

S106
Error

Capturing Condition Auto If an error occurs in the “Capturing condition auto adjustment” of the 2D code reader, try again.
S109
Adjustment Error If an error occurs in the “Brightness and Magnification Adjustment” of the XY tracking, try again.

S110 No Log Data Execute after saving a log data.

1-78 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Appendix

Appendix
ASCII code list
Upper 4 bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
NUL DLE SP
SOH DC1 !
0
1
@
A
P
Q
`
a
p
q
1
2 STX DC2 “ 2 B R b r

Communication Interface
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAC % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w
Lower 4 bit
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l ―
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 1-79

 Appendix

Model-Specific Input Value List

MD-X2000/2500
Parameter Unit Standard area Wide area Small spot
MD-X2000/2500 MD-X2020/2520 MD-X2050
Line width mm 0.010 to 5.000 0.010 to 7.500 0.010 to 2.500

1 Height/Width

Logo Height/Width
mm

mm
000.100 to 125.000

000.002 to 125.000
000.100 to 330.000

000.005 to 330.000
000.001 to 050.000

000.001 to 50.000
Communication Interface

Arc character space mm 000.000 to 180.000 000.000 to 450.000 000.000 to 075.000

Character space mm 000.000 to 180.000 000.000 to 450.000 000.000 to 075.000

Character full width/full height mm 000.100 to 180.000 000.100 to 450.000 000.100 to 075.000

Character pitch mm -180.000 to 0180.000 -450.000 to 0450.000 -075.000 to 0075.000

Barcode height mm 000.200 to 125.000 000.300 to 330.000 000.100 to 050.000

Linear code height mm 000.200 to 125.000 000.500 to 330.000 000.100 to 050.000

X coordinate mm -062.500 to 0062.500 -165.000 to 0165.000 -025.000 to 0025.000

Y coordinate mm -062.500 to 0062.500 -165.000 to 0165.000 -025.000 to 0025.000

Z coordinate mm -021.000 to 0021.000 -021.000 to 0021.000 -015.000 to 0015.000

Sphere diameter, Cylinder diameter,

Bottom diameter of cone, Top diameter of mm 0000.200 to 0480.000 0000.200 to 1200.000 0000.200 to 0200.000
cone

Cone height mm 000.100 to 125.000 000.100 to 330.000 000.100 to 050.000

Scan speed mm/s 00001 to 12000 00001 to 08000 00001 to 06000

Approach scan speed mm/s 0 to 04000 0 to 06000 0 to 02000

Pulse frequency kHz 000 to 400

Spot variable - -210 to 0210 -210 to 0210 -150 to 0150

Deep dig amount mm 00.000 to 42.000 00.000 to 42.000 00.000 to 30.000

Matrix Height/Width mm 000.000 to 125.000 000.000 to 330.000 000.000 to 050.000

Line speed mm/s 0000.1 to 4000.0 0000.1 to 2000.0 0000.1 to 2000.0

Start Position mm -062.500 to 0062.500 -165.000 to 0165.000 -025.000 to 0025.000

End Position mm -062.500 to 0062.500 -165.000 to 0165.000 -025.000 to 0025.000

Z coordinate correction amount mm -42.000 to 042.000 -42.000 to 042.000 -30.000 to 030.000

Upper tolerance limit mm -20.999 to 042.000 -20.999 to 042.000 -14.999 to 030.000

Lower tolerance limit mm -42.000 to 20.999 -42.000 to 20.999 -30.000 to 014.999

Movement reference point X/Y

coordinates(Correct inside the horizontal mm -062.500 to 0062.500 -165.000 to 0165.000 -025.000 to 0025.000
plane)

Correction amount X/Y(Correct inside the

mm -125.000 to 0125.000 -330.000 to 0330.000 -050.000 to 0050.00
horizontal plane)

X/Y coordinates position correction in the unit

mm -062.500 to 0062.500 -165.000 to 0165.000 -025.000 to 0025.000
setup

Z coordinate position correction in the unit

mm -21.000 to 021.000 -21.000 to 021.000 -15.000 to 015.000
setup

1-80 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 2
EtherNet/IP
2

EtherNet/IP
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
What is EtherNet/IP?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
EtherNet/IP communication specifications and
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible laser markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Compatible PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cyclic communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cyclic communication with the laser marker. . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to configure the laser marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Configuring the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Status of device assignment of
the MD information area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
KEYENCE KV Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
OMRON PLC CJ2 Series Program Example. . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Ladder Program
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-1

 Getting Started

Getting Started
What is EtherNet/IP? EtherNet/IP communication
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network proposed by the
specifications and functions
ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,Inc.).
EtherNet/IP communications can be shared and used with standard „„
EtherNet/IP communication specifications of
Ethernet and network communications. the laser marker
zz
Scanner and adapters Number of
16
In EtherNet/IP, one of the two devices opens a communication line connections

2
called a “connection” with the other device. The side that opens a
Keyence KV
connection is referred to as a “scanner” (originator); and the side that is 2 to 320 bytes
Series
opened is referred to as an “adapter” (target). Typically, the PLC is used
for the scanner. The laser marker is an adapter device. Cyclic communication OMRON
(Implicit messages) 2 to 320 bytes
Communication CJ/CS series
zz
EtherNet/IP

Cyclic communication size

EtherNet/IP offers cyclic communication (Implicit message) for sending Rockwell
and receiving data on a periodic basis. It allows you to set the RPI Automation
2 to 320 bytes
(communication cycle) based on the priority of the sent/received data, ControlLogix
enabling sending and receiving of data with adjustment of the overall CompactLogix
communication load.

Communication cycle „„
Overview of the EtherNet/IP functions of the
(RPI) setting laser marker
MD-X2000 : 10ms
You can read the laser marker statuses and/or execute various
MD-X2020 : 50ms
operations via the EtherNet/IP communication. Refer to the device map
MD-X2500 : 100ms
for details.

Compatible laser markers

Laser marker model Software
MD-X2000 MD-X2020 MD-X2500
10ms 50ms 100ms MD-X2000/2020/2050/2500/2520/400/450 Marking Builder Plus

The MD-X400/450 can use an MD-X2000 series EDS file.

In this case, some displays may be the contents of
the MD-X2000 series.

Compatible PLCs
For more details on how to configure each PLC, refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding PLC.

zz
Keyence
PLC model EtherNet/IP communication unit Firmware version Software

KV-3000/5000 Series KV-EP21V Ver.2 or later KV STUDIO (Ver.6.0 or later)

* The KV-7300/7500 series uses Ver. 8.0 or later,
KV-7000/8000 Series KV-XLE02/EP21V Ver.2 or later
The KV-XLE02 uses Ver. 9.2 or later,
KV-5500/7500/8000 Built-in port/KV-EP21V Ver.2 or later KV-8000 series uses Ver. 10.0 or later

zz
OMRON
PLC model EtherNet/IP communication unit Firmware version Software

SYSMAC CJ2 Built-in port/CJ1WEIP21 V1.0 or later

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1WEIP21 V1.0 or later Cx-One (Ver.3.0 or later)

SYSMAC CS1 CS1WEIP21 V1.0 or later

zz
Rockwell Automation
PLC model EtherNet/IP communication unit Firmware version Software

1756 ControlLogix 1756-ENBT Ver.13 or later

1769 CompactLogix Built-in port Ver.13 or later

RsLogix5000 (Ver.13 or later)
OD firmwarelevel Series C,
1747 SLC5/05 Built-in port
FRN 10 or later

1761/1766 MicroLogix Built-in port/1761-NETENI

Series A, Revision A, FRN1 RsLogix500 (Ver.7.10 or later)
1762/1763/1764 MicroLogix 1761-NETENI

Either a straight or crossover LAN cable can be used.

2-2 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

Cyclic communication
Cyclic communication with the laser marker How to configure the laser marker
Cyclic communication performs periodic communication (several to The laser marker is configured as follows using Marking Builder Plus.
several dozen ms) and is suitable for real-time control. The update time
and communication size depend on the connection settings on the PLC
side. 1 Select [Controller] of the [Settings] tab, and
then [Communication Settings].

2 Set the Ethernet communication settings.

Set these items as appropriate for your network environment.
Setting example
2

EtherNet/IP
IP address 192.168.0.20

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 0.0.0.0

PLC MD-X2000/2500 series

Laser marker Laser marker

information storage information storage
area area

Controller status Controller status

Error status Error status

Busy status Busy status

Reading result Communication Reading result

cycle
Configured
on the PLC side
Requested Requested
information Storage information Storage
area area

Marking instruction Marking instruction

Reading instruction Reading instruction

Command
instruction
Command
instruction
3 Set Industrial Ethernet to [EtherNet/IP].
The EtherNet/IP setting items will appear.

• Read the “Safety Information” in the user's

manual for the applicable model to perform
4 Set the Input/Output assembly size.
operation in the state that the safety is secured These items should be set according to the PLC settings.
by using security function even when the network Setting example
failure occurs.
• Confirm the safe operation by considering the Endian Little-Endian
communication delay due to the communication
Input assembly size 320 (bytes)
time or network overload state.
Output assembly size 288 (bytes)
Even if you specify the update time for cyclic
communication to 10 ms or longer, the processing
may be delayed or the communication may be
disconnected by temporary timeout due to the
excessive temporary or continuous load on the
controller, caused by simultaneous communication
functions being used in the controller such as dialog
operations and commands. In such case, the periodic
communication settings and use condition need to
be reviewed. Be sure to check for these and other
problems in the operating performance before entering
production.

If you modify the EtherNet/IP settings, the unit must

be restarted for the changes to take effect.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-3

 Cyclic communication

Configuring the PLC

PLC settings
Configure the following settings on the PLC when using cyclic communication.
(1) The connection to be used
(2) The device settings to be used for cyclic communication
(For more details on the setting method, refer to the manual of each PLC.)

When using the KV series, (1) and (2) are set automatically when you make a selection in the KV STUDIO.

zz
Connection to be used

2 In EtherNet/IP, a connection is opened from the scanner during cyclic communication. There are many types of connections, and the connection available
is different for each device. The type of connection available for the laser marker is Exclusive Owner.

Connection type Data type Instance ID Size (bytes) RPI (ms)

EtherNet/IP

Exclusive Owner Result data (Input Assemblies) 0X64 (100) 2 to 320

1 to 10000
(Data transmission + control) Control data (Output Assemblies) 0X65 (101) 2 to 288

zz
What is Exclusive Owner?
This type of connection allows communication between the PLC and laser marker.
It allows you to send a marking start instruction from the PLC to the laser marker or send a status notification from the laser marker to the PLC.
Only a single [Exclusive Owner] connection can be set for a laser marker.

How to configure the KEYENCE KV series

Connect the KV with the PC using an Ethernet cable and launch KV STUDIO.

1 Create a new project. 3 Transfer the unit configuration to a PLC.

Select [Monitor/Simulator(N)] > [PLC Transfer(W)] to start the

2 In the [Unit Settings (2)] tab of the unit editor,

set the IP address and subnet mask of the
transfer.

unit having the port for EtherNet/IP.

4 Display the EtherNet/IP settings.

Select [Tools(T)] > [Built-in EtherNet Settings(E)] > [EtherNet/
IP(W)] to open the setting screen.

• Set the IP address such that it is different from that

of the laser marker.
• Match the subnet mask value with that of the laser
marker.
• If you are using a unit other than KV-
5500/7500/8000, configure the IP address
and subnet mask after adding the EtherNet/IP
communication unit (KV-EP21V) to the unit.

2-4 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

5 Add the laser marker to a device. 8 Register the device comment.

Add the [MD-X2000/2500 Series] in the [Device List (1)] tab to the Double click the device comment in the project, and open the
device screen by drag and drop. device comment edit window. Switch distinct unit editing to “MD-X2”,
click the [Detail] button, and then click [Register unit Device] and
[Reg].

EtherNet/IP
If you cannot find the target model in the device list,
add MD-X2000/2500 from [EDS File(D)] > [Reg]. The
ez1 file is stored in the location described below.
C:\Program Files (x86)\keyence\Marking Builder
Plus_Ver*\etc\EtherNetIP\[model name]
(Ver* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)

6 Set the IP address of the laser marker.

Match the IP address with the IP address set on the laser marker
side.

7 Save the settings and close the EtherNet/IP

screen.
Save the settings and close the screen after confirming that the
laser marker has been added under EtherNet/IP as shown below.

The device comment related to EtherNet/IP of the

laser marker will be registered automatically as follow.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-5

 Cyclic communication

How to configure the OMRON CJ2 series 4 Set the IP address of PLC.
After setting the IP address and subnet mask, select [Transfer[PC to
Connect the PLC with the laser marker using an Ethernet cable and launch Unit]], and transfer the parameter to the unit.
CX-Programmer.

1 Create a new project.

2 Connect PLC.
Select [Auto Online] > [Direct Online] from [PLC] menu. Select the
connection type with PLC to connect.

2
EtherNet/IP

• Set the IP address such that it is different from that

of the laser marker.
• Match the subnet mask value with that of the laser
marker.
• To enable the transferred settings, the unit needs to
be restarted.

5 Start up Network Configurator.

Right click [Built In EtherNet/IP Port] of connected PLC, select [Start
Special Application] and then [Start with Settings Inherited].
The [Select Special Application] screen appears, and select
[Network Configurator].

This part describes how to connect via USB.

3 Display the TCP/IP parameter edit screen of PLC.

Double click [I/O Table and Unit Setup] in the project workspace,
then double click [Built In EtherNet/IP Port] of connected PLC.

6 Select interface.
Select [Select Interface] > [CJ2 USB/Serial Port] from [Option] menu.

2-6 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

7 Connect with PLC. 10 Display the device parameter edit window

Select [Connect] from the [Network] menu, set [Setup Interface] > Right click the PLC icon in the network window, and select
[Select Connect Network Port] > [Select Network] according to the [Parameter] > [Edit].
device environment, and then connect it.

8 Upload the network setting.

If [Upload] is selected from the [Network] menu, the IP address

11 Set the In-Consume/Out-Produce area tag.

of the device which has been connected to network is displayed.
Check that the IP address of the connection target device has been
displayed, select [OK], and complete the upload.
Select the [In-Consume] tab, and click [New].
Set the tag name to “E0_00000” (first address of input data
memory), and set the size to “320 Byte”.

EtherNet/IP
9 Install EDS file
Select [Install] from [EDS File] menu.

Next, select the [Out-Produce] tab, and click [New].

Set the tag name to “D00000” (first address of output data memory),
and set the size to “288 Byte”.

The EDS file of the laser marker is located in the

folder below.
C:\Program Files (x86)\keyence\Marking Builder
Plus_Ver*\etc\EtherNetIP\[model name]
(Ver* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)
The data size of this setting method is the default
setting value.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-7

 Cyclic communication

12 Associate the tags between PLC and MD-X

Select the [Connection] tab.
Select the MD-X in the [Unregister Device List]. Then click [↓] to
register the device in [Register Device List].

2
EtherNet/IP

13 Double click the device to be registered, and

display the [Edit Connection] screen.
Set “Connection I/O Type”, “Originator Device”, and “Target Device”
as follow, and click [Reg].

zz
Setting example
€
€Connection I/O Type
Class1
€
€Originator Device (PLC)

Input Tag Set E0_00000

Connection Type Multi-cast connection

Output Tag Set D00000

Connection Type Point to Point connection

€
€Target Device (Laser Marker)

Output Tag Set Input_100

Input Tag Set Input_100

14 Return to the [Edit Device Parameters] screen,

and select [OK].
The PLC setting is completed by the above setting method.

For details about how to operate CX-Programmer and

Network Configurator, refer to PLC user's manual.

2-8 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

How to configure the Allen-Bradley 3 Configure the MD-X Ethernet Module

Name the module and enter the Ethernet IP Address of the MD-X
Control/Compact Logix series laser marker.
Then, click [Change] and change the data size from [SINT] to [INT].
Connect the PLC to the laser marker using an Ethernet cable and Click [OK] when finished.
launch RSLogix5000.

1 Install the MD-X EDS File.

In RSLogix5000, click [Tools] then select [EDS Hardware
Installation Tool].
Follow Rockwell Automation EDS wizard for registering an EDS
file.

2
The EDS file of the laser marker is located in the
folder below.
C:\Program Files (x86)\keyence\Marking Builder
Plus_Ver*\etc\EtherNetIP\[model name]
(Ver* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)

EtherNet/IP
2 Add an MD-X Ethernet Module.
Right click [I/O Configuration] > [Ethernet], and select [New Module].
Select [MD-X2000/2500] and click [Create].

[INT] should be selected since the MD-X2000/2500

series uses 16-bit (2 bytes) addresses. You must
enter the assembly size obtained by dividing the
assembly size of the laser marker by 2.
By default, the laser marker's input assembly size
is 320 and output assembly size is 288. Therefore
the PLC's input assembly size should be 160 and
output assembly size should be 144.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-9

 Cyclic communication

Status of device assignment of the MD information area

In the device, there is an area for writing laser marker state to the PLC and an area for writing instructions from the PLC to the laser marker. It is divided
into bit area and word area.

Input Assemblies Memory Map

Laser marker -> PLC
Address Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

External Logging Laser Safety Remote Shutter Laser

Job Change Network Shutter I/O Error Warning Error Ready
0 Lighting Trigger Module Interlock Control Emitted
Ready Status Status Status Status Status Status Status
Control Status Status Status Status Status Status

2 1
Window
Monitoring
Busy Status
Mark Check
/2DC Read
Busy Status
Job Edit
Busy
Status
Communication
Priority Error
Status
Job Change
Busy Status
Guide
Laser Busy
Status
Marking
Busy
Status
Busy
Status

Mark Check Mark Check Counter Counter Counter Counter Measurement Internal Laser Operation Trigger
Marking Date Attach Date Hold
EtherNet/IP

2 /2DC Read /2DC Read End4 End3 End2 End1 Laser Stop Lighting Control Stop Lock
Complete1 Status Status
NG Status 1 OK Status 1 Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status

3-Axis 3-Axis Mark Check Mark Check

3 Tracking Tracking /2DC Read /2DC Read
NG Status OK Status NG Status 2 OK Status 2

Window Guide
Job Edit 2DC Read Error Clear Laser Stop Marking
4 Monitoring Laser
Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete2
Complete Complete

System Info Counter Counter Counter Rank Job

Counter Up Counter No
5 ID Change Reset Down Value Change Change
Complete Complete
Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete

String Marked Setting

6 Change String Read String Read
Complete Complete Complete

Z Tracking XY Tracking Command

7 Result Read Result Read Send
Complete Complete Complete

Window 2DC Read Error Clear

Job Edit Stop Marking Guide Laser Start Marking
8 Monitoring Request Request
Error Request Error Request Error Request Error
Request Error Error Error

System Info System Info Counter Counter Up Counter Counter

Counter Down Rank Change Job Change
9 ID Change ID Change Reset Request Value Change No Change
Request Error Request Error Request Error
Error Error Request Error Error Request Error Request Error

Marked String Setting String

String Change
10 Read Request Read Request
Request Error
Error Error

Z Tracking XY Tracking Command

11 Result Result Send Request
Request Error Request Error Error

12 Error Code 1

13 Error Code 2

14 Command Send Error Status

15

16 Job No Status

17 Counter No Status

18/19 Counter Value Status

20 Rank Value Status

21 System Info ID

22/23 System Info Value

24 Marking Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status1

25 Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status1

26 Marking Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2

27 Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status 2

28/29 Total Marking Count Status

30 Response Data Size

31 - 155 Response Data

2-10 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

„„
Bit area for writing laser marker state on the PLC
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The laser marker information is written in the PLC bit area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.

Address bit Name Status Information Description

Displays the ready status. When the device status is Ready, operations such
0: Not Ready as start marking, job change, and character string change are accepted
0 Ready Status
1: Ready
Linked I/O Terminal Trigger ready output
Displays the error (E***) status. To recover from an error, eliminate the
0: Not Error causes of the error first, and then turn on Error Clear.
1 Error Status
1: Error
Linked I/O Terminal Error output

0: Not Warning Displays the warning error (W***) status.

2
2 Warning Status
1: Warning Linked I/O Terminal Warning output
0: Not I/O Error
3 I/O Error Status Displays the terminal block error (T***) status.
1: I/O Error

EtherNet/IP
0: Open Shutter Displays whether the internal shutter is opened or closed.
4 Shutter Status
1: Close Shutter Linked I/O Terminal Shutter status output
0: No Connection
5 Network Status Displays the Fieldbus network communication status.
1: Connection
0 Job Change Ready 0: Not Ready Displays the job switching ready status.
6
Status 1: Ready Linked I/O Terminal Job switching ready status

0: Laser Not Excited Displays the laser excitation status.

8 Laser Emitted Status
1: Laser Excited Linked I/O Terminal Laser excitation status output
0 : OFF (Close)
9 Shutter Control Status Displays whether the shutter control input is on or off.
1 : ON (Open)
0 : OFF (Close)
10 Remote Interlock Status Displays whether the remote interlock input is on or off.
1 : ON (Open)
Displays whether the laser safety module control input is on or off.
Laser Safety Module 0 : OFF (Close)
11 Displays the status where the laser emission stops when it is “1 (ON)”. When
Status 1 : ON (Open)
the laser safety module (MD-C1) is not mounted, it is always “0”.

0: OFF Displays whether the logging trigger input is on or off.

12 Logging Trigger Status
1: ON Linked I/O Terminal Logging trigger input

External Lighting Control 0: OFF Displays whether the external lighting control output is on or off.
13
Status 1: ON Linked I/O Terminal External Lighting Control Output
If one or more of the following busy statuses are on, Busy Status turns on.
Marking Busy, Guide Laser Busy, Job Change Busy, Commmunication
0 Busy Status
Priority, Job Edit Busy, Mark Cheeck/2DC Read Busy Status Window
Monitoring Busy
Turns on during marking (including laser inspection).
1 Marking Busy Status
Linked I/O Terminal Output During Marking
Turns on when guide laser marking is in operation (including the distance
2 Guide Laser Busy Status pointer).
Linked I/O Terminal Guide Laser Output

0: Not Busy Turns on when a job is being deployed.

1 3 Job Change Busy Status
1: Busy (Deployment timing: when changing marking jobs, content, and so on)
Communication Priority Displays the communication priority status. Turns on when the laser marker
4
Error Status is connected to an external control device and in the no priority state.
Turns on when the Job Edit Start Request turns on and editing starts.
5 Job Edit Busy Status Returns to “OFF” when the Job Edit Start Request is turned off and editing is
completed.
Mark Check /2DC Read
6 Turns on when the marking verification function or 2DC reading is operating.
Busy Status
Turns on during the lens inspection. This not only turns on when the operation
Window Monitoring Busy
7 is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications, but also when this
Status
operation is started by another communication before or after marking.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-11

 Cyclic communication

Address bit Name Status Information Description

0 Trigger Lock Status Displays whether the trigger lock input is on or off.
1 Operation Stop Status Displays whether the processing operation stop input is on or off.
2 Laser Control Status Displays whether the laser stop input is on or off.
0: OFF
3 Date Hold Status 1: ON Displays whether the date hold input is on or off.
4 Internal Lighting Status Displays whether the internal lighting control input is on or off.
Measurement Laser Stop
5 Displays whether the displacement detecting laser stop input is on or off.
Status

0: OFF Displays the status of date attach output.

8 Date Attach Status
1: ON Linked I/O Terminal Date attach output

2
9 Counter End1 Status
Displays the status of counter end output 1 - 4. You can use the Controller
10 Counter End2 Status settings of the Marking Builder Plus to assign the individual and common
0: Not Complete
11 Counter End3 Status 1: Complete counters (0 to 9, A to J).
EtherNet/IP

12 Counter End4 Status Linked I/O Terminal Counter end output 1 - 4

2
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
0→1: OK assessment result is OK or not.* 1
1→0 : - Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment result of
Mark Check/2DC Read [Reset Timing] the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read
13
OK Status 1 Reset when 2DC Read Request OK Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear screen.
turns on.
Linked I/O Terminal Marking/2D code check OK output
Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
0→1: NG
assessment result is OK or not. 1
1→0 : -
Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment result of
Mark Check/2DC Read [Reset timing] the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read
14
NG Status 1 Reset when 2DC Read Request NG Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear screen.
turns on.
Linked I/O Terminal Marking/2D code check OK output

0: Not Complete Displays the status of marking complete output.

15 Marking Complete 1
1: Complete Linked I/O Terminal Marking complete output
0→1: OK Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
1→0 : - assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Mark Check/2DC Read Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade assessment
0 [Reset Timing]
OK Status 2 result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status 1.
Reset when 2DC Read Request
Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting screen.
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
turns on. Linked I/O Terminal Marking/2D code check OK output
0→1: OK Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade
1→0 : - assessment result is OK or not.* 1
Mark Check/2DC Read Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade assessment
1 [Reset Timing]
NG Status 2 result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status 1.
Reset when 2DC Read Request
3 Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting screen.
or 2DC Read Complete Bit Clear
turns on. Linked I/O Terminal Marking/2D code check NG output
Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking function,
3-Axis Tracking OK 0→1: OK or when the tracking has been completed successfully. Turns on by AND
2 condition when using multiple tracking settings.
Status 1→0 : -
Linked I/O Terminal 3-Axis Tracking OK Output
Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking function, or
3-Axis Tracking NG 0→1: NG when the tracking has failed. Turns on by OR condition when using multiple
3 tracking settings.
Status 1→0 : -
Linked I/O Terminal 3-Axis Tracking NG Output
Displays the completion status of marking initiated with Start Marking
0 Marking Complete 2
Request. If marking has been canceled, it does not turn on.* 2
Displays the completion status of guide laser marking started with Guide
1 Guide Laser Complete Laser Request. If completed, regardless of how it was canceled, be it
communications, I/O, or the like, it turns on.* 2
0: Not Complete Displays the completion status of Stop Marking Request. Even if marking is
2 Laser Stop Complete 11: Complete started from other communications or I/O, if cancellation is completed with
[Reset timing] Stop Marking Request, the bit turns on.
4
Reset when the Complete Clear Displays the completion status of Error Clear Request. After completion, it
3 Error Clear Complete Bit statuses turn on or the next turns on, regardless of whether error clearing was successful or not.* 2
Request turns on.
4 2DC Read Complete Displays the completion status of 2DC Read Request.* 2
Window Monitoring
5 Turns on when completing the lens inspection.* 2
Complete
Displays the completion status of editing initiated with Job Edit Start Request.
8 Job Edit Complete
If it completes successfully, the bit turns on.

2-12 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

Address bit Name Status Information Description

0 Job Change Complete Displays the completion status of Job Change Request.* 2
1 Rank Change Complete Displays the completion status of Rank Change Request.* 2
2 Counter No Complete Displays the completion status of Counter No Change Request.* 2
3 Counter Value Complete Displays the completion status of Counter Value Change Request.* 2
Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter Up
5 4 Counter Up Complete
Request.* 2
Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter Down
5 Counter Down Complete
Request.* 2
6 Counter Reset Complete 0: Not Complete Displays the completion status of the reset with Counter Reset Request.* 2
11: Complete

2
System Info ID Change Displays the completion status of the operation information ID by System Info
8
Complete [Reset timing] ID Change Request.
Reset when the Complete Clear
Setting String Read
0 Bit statuses turn on or the next Displays the completion status of Setting String Read Request.* 2
Complete
Request turns on.

EtherNet/IP
6 Marked String Read
1 Displays the completion status of Marked String Read Request.* 2
Complete
2 String Change Complete Displays the completion status of String Change Request.* 2
Command Send
8 Displays the completion status of Command Send Request.* 2
Complete
XY Tracking Result Read
7 9 Display the completion status of XY Tracking Result Request.* 2
Complete
Z Tracking Result Read
10 Display the completion status of Z Tracking Result Request.* 2
Complete
If the marking operation started with Start Marking Request fails, the bit turns
Start Marking Request
0 on.
Error
If marking is canceled or marking cannot start without priority, it turns on.* 3
If the guide laser operation started with Guide Laser Request fails, the bit
Guide Laser Request
1 turns on. If Guide Laser Request is turned on when the guide laser cannot be
Error
irradiated or cannot be started without priority, it turns on.* 3
Stop Marking Request If a Stop Marking Request fails to stop marking, the bit turns on.
2
8 Error *3
3 Error Clear Request Error If an Error Clear Request fails to clear the error, it turns on.* 3
4 2DC Read Request Error If a 2DC Read Request fails to read a 2D code, the bit turns on.
Window Monitoring If a Window Monitoring Request fails in the lens inspection operation, it turns
5
Request Error on.* 3
If a Job Edit Start Request fails to edit the job, it turns on.* If edit start is not
8 Job Edit Error 0: Not Error received or if data cannot be deployed when editing finishes, the bit turns on.
1: Error
Job Change Request
0 [Reset timing] If a job change with a Job Change Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Error
Reset when the Complete Bit
Rank Change Request Clear statuses turn on or the next If an I/O specified character change with a Rank Change Request fails, it
1
Error Request turns on. turns on.* 3
Counter No Change If a number change with a Counter No Change Request fails, the bit turns on.
2
Request Error *3
If a value change with a Counter Value Change Request fails, the bit turns
Counter Value Change
3 on.
Request Error
9 *3
Counter Up Request If a value change with a Counter Up Request fails, it turns on.* 3
4
Error Receivable condition: Ready ON
Counter Down Request If a value change with a Counter Down Request fails, it turns on.* 3
5
Error Receivable condition: Ready ON
Counter Reset Request If a reset with a Counter Reset Request fails, it turns on.* 3
6
Error Receivable condition: Ready ON
System Info IDChange If a change of the operation information ID with a System Info ID Change
7
Error Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Setting String Read 0: Not Complete
0 If reading with a Setting String Read Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Request Error 1: Complete
Marked String Read [Reset timing] If reading with a Marked String Read Request fails, the bit turns on.
10 1
Request Error Reset when the Complete Bit *3
String Change Request Clear statuses turn on or the next If a change with a String Change Request fails, the bit turns on.
2 Request turns on.
Error It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3
Command Send Request 0: Not Complete If Command Send Request fails, the bit turns on.
8
Error 1: Complete It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3
XY Tracking Result [Reset timing]
11 9 When XY Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 2
Request Error Reset when the Complete Bit
Z Tracking Result Clear statuses turn on or the next
10 Request turns on. When Z Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 2
Request Error

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-13

 Cyclic communication

* 1 If a code is read with the settable 2D code reading function on Marking Builder Plus, OK/NG is output with the grade that is set as the
threshold as the reference. If code is read with 2DC Read Request, OK/NG is output for whether the code was successfully read or not. (Even
if the code reads with a F Grade, OK is output.)
* 2 The bit turns at completion only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications. If you start the operation with other
forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if the operation completes.
* 3 The bit turns on at error only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications. If you started the operation with other
forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if an error occurs.

Remote interlock input, shutter interlock input, and laser excitement input cannot be controlled from Ethernet/IP. Control those inputs from I/O.

„„
Word area for writing laser marker state on the PLC
In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The laser marker information is written in the PLC word area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.

2 Address
12
Data Type
Word
Name
Error Code 1
Status Information Description
Displays the number for the error currently occurring. The error
number display differs to the normal display.
EtherNet/IP

The error codes are displayed as four digits such as 1*** for an
Error Number error (E***), 2*** for a warning error (W***), and 3*** for an I/O
13 Word Error Code 2 error (T***).
Up to two errors can be displayed. When three or more errors
occur, confirm the errors through Marking Builder Plus.
Error Number
[Reset timing] If Command Send Request fails due to a software error, the
Command Send Error Command Send Request error number is displayed. The error number display differs to
14 Word
Status Reset when Complete Bit Clear the normal display. A software error (S***) is displayed as 4*** in
turns on or the next Command four digits.
Send Request turns on.
16 Word Job No Status Job Number (0 to 1999) Displays the currently selected job number.
• Counter Value Change/Up/Down/Reset Request that is to be
changed
17 Word Counter No Status Counter Number (0 to 19) • Counter Value Status that is to be displayed
Displays the number of the target counter listed above.
Changes with Counter No Change Request.
Counter Value Displays the current counter value set to be displayed for
18/19 DWord Counter Value Status
(0 to 4294967295) Counter No Change Request.
I/O Encoded Character Value
20 Word Rank Value Status Displays the value for I/O specified characters.
(0 to 35)
21 Word System Info ID System Info ID (0 to 301) Displays the currently selected operation information ID.
System Info Value
22/23 DWord System Info Value Displays the operation information specified by System Info ID.
(0 to 4294967295)
Any of the following are displayed:
• 2D code reading (Defaults) : Read fail of AIM DPM
comprehensive determination
[When acquiring 2DC reading] grade or F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/B(3)/A(4)
0 to 4 • Marking verification function : score
[When using the marking Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the
verification function] assessment result of the marking verification function will be
Marking Check Score/
24 Word 000 to 100 displayed in Marking Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2.
2DC Read Grade Status 1
[Reset timing] Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
Reset when 2DC Read Complete screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Bit Clear turns on or the next 2DC When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade,
Read Request turns on. even if you started the operation with communications and I/
O other than 2DC Read Request, the result is displayed after
the operation is completed. When reading multiple numbers of
codes, displays the minimum value.
Displays the execution count of the 2D code reading or the
0 to 65535 execution count of the marking verification functions. Displays
Marking Check/ the execution count of the 2D code reading by default, and the
25 Word 2DC Read Total Count [Reset timing] execution count of the marking verification functions will be
Status 1 It will be reset to “0” when the displayed in Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status 2.
power is turned off. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Any of the following are displayed:
• Marking verification function (defaults) : score
[When using the marking • 2D code reading : Read fail of AIM DPM comprehensive
verification function] determination grade or
000 to 100 F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/B(3)/A(4)

[When acquiring 2DC reading] Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade
Marking Check Score/ result of the 2D code reading will be displayed in Marking Check
26 Word 0 to 4
2DC Read Grade Status 2 Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed
[Reset timing] in the communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Resets when 2DC Read Complete When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade,
Bit Clear turns on or the next 2DC even if you started the operation with communications and I/
Read Request turns on. O other than 2DC Read Request, the result is displayed after
the operation is completed. When reading multiple numbers of
codes, displays the minimum value.

2-14 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

Address Data Type Name Status Information Description

Displays the execution count of the marking verification function
0 to 65535 or the execution count of the 2D code reading. Displays the
Marking Check/ execution count of the marking verification function by default,
27 Word 2DC Read Total Count [Reset timing] and the execution count of the 2D code reading in Marking
Status 2 It will be reset to “0” when the Check/2DC Read Total Count Status 1.
power is turned off. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting
screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Total Marking Count Marking Count
28/29 DWord Displays the marking count.
Status (0 to 4294967295)
30 Word Response Data Size Data size (2 bytes) Stores the data length of “Response Data” in 16-bit binary data.
The following response data are displayed:

2
• Setting/Marked String Request
• 2DC Read Request (read content)
Response • Command Send Request
• XY Tracking Result Request
[Reset timing] • Z Tracking Result Request

EtherNet/IP
31 to 155 Character Response Data Reset when each Complete Bit * Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on
Clear request turns on or the next the PLC settings. (Default: 128 bytes. Fixed at 250 bytes in the
Request turns on. KEYENCE PLC “KV Series”.) However, if the response data
is greater than the selected byte number, all the data cannot
be received. Additionally, even if 252 bytes is selected, the
maximum amount of data that will be received is 250 bytes.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-15

 Cyclic communication

Output Assemblies Memory Map

PLC -> Laser Marker

Address Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

Job Edit Window Error Stop Guide Start

2DC Read
0 Start Monitoring Clear Marking Laser Marking
Request
Request Request Request Request Request Request

System Info Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Rank Job

1 ID Change Reset Down Up Value Change No Change Change Change
Request Request Request Request Request Request Request Request

String Marked Set String

2 Change String Read Read
Request Request Request

2 3
Z Tracking
Result
Request
XY Tracking Command
Result
Request
Send
Request

Measurement Internal Laser Operation Trigger

EtherNet/IP

Date Hold
4 Laser Stop Lighting Stop Stop Lock
Request
Request Request Request Request Request

Window Guide
Job Edit 2DC Read Error Clear Laser Stop Marking
Monitoring Laser
6 Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete
Complete Complete
Bit Clear Bit Clear Bit Clear Bit Clear Bit Clear
Bit Clear Bit Clear

System Info Counter Counter Rank Job

Counter Reset Counter Down Counter Up
ID Change Value Change No Change Change Change
7 Complete Bit Complete Bit Complete
Complete Complete Bit Complete Complete Complete
Clear Clear Bit Clear
Clear Clear Bit Clear Bit Clear Bit Clear

String Marked Set String

Change String Read Read
8
Complete Complete Complete
Bit Clear Bit Clear Bit Clear

3-Axis
Command
Tracking
Send
9 Result Read
Complete
Complete Bit
Bit Clear
Clear

10/11 Request No

12 Request Data Size

13 - 137 Request Data

2-16 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

„„
Bit area for writing the request from the PLC onto the laser marker
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The request from the PLC is written onto the laser marker via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.

Address bit Name Status Information Description

0→1: Start
1→0 : - Starts the marking. If marking cannot be performed or is canceled, Start
0 Start Marking Request Marking Request Error turns on. The Marking Busy Status turns on during
[Condition of operation] marking. If marking completes successfully, Marking Complete 1 and 2 turn on.
The Ready Status is turned on.

Starts guide laser marking. Enter the number into Request No. beforehand.
0→1: Start 0: Distance pointer 1: Guide laser once
1→0 : -

2
2: Guide laser continuously 3: Area frame
[Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned on. 4: Work image 5: Block frame
1 Guide Laser Request
* During shutter control, laser
If marking completes or is canceled (including canceled due to an error)
safety module control, and safety
after a set amount of time, the Guide Laser Request Complete bit turns on. If

EtherNet/IP
shutter control, it is accepted even
guide laser marking cannot start, Guide Laser Request Error turns on.
if the Ready Status is turned off.
If the move marking setting is selected, guide laser marking cannot be used.
The error bit turns on.

0→1: Stop
1→0 : -
2 Stop Marking Request [Condition of operation] Cancels marking.
The Marking Busy Status is turned
on.
0
If an error occurs, remove the cause of the error and then turn this bit on to
clear the error. An Error Status Bits error cannot be cleared (it is reset when
0→1: Error Clear the Complete Bit Clear statuses turn on or the next Request turns on). After
3 Error Clear Request
1→0 : - the operation has been completed, Error Clear Complete turns on regardless
of whether the error is cleared successfully or not. If the error cannot be
cleared, Error Clear Request Error turns on.

0→1: Start Reads 2D code. If this request is run when the condition of operation is not
1→0 : - satisfied, Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status, Mark Check/2DC Read NG
4 2DC Read Request Status, and 2DC Read Complete are reset, and 2DC Read Request Error
[Condition of operation] turns on.
The Ready Status is turned on. * It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

0→1: Start Starts the lens inspection. If this request is run when the condition of
Window Monitoring 1→0 : - operation is not satisfied, Window Monitoring Complete is reset, and Window
5
Request [Condition of operation] Monitoring Request Error is turned on.
The Ready Status is turned on. * It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

Starts the job editing. If the start edit request is received successfully, the
job change request after that is retained temporarily in the controller, and the
0→1: Edit Start job is deployed all at once when editing is completed. Use this request if you
8 Job Edit Start Request
1→0: Edit End want to reduce the communication time used by job editing. If edit start is
received successfully, Job Edit Busy Status turns on. Additionally, if edit start
is received successfully, Job Edit Complete turns on. 1

0 Job Change Request Changes the job number. * 1

1 Rank Change Request Changes the I/O specified characters. * 1

Counter No Change
2 Changes the number of the counter to be changed. * 1
Request

Counter Value Change Changes the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
3
Request Request. * 1

Increases the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
4 Counter Up Request
Request. * 1

Reduces the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change
5 Counter Down Request
Request. * 1

6 Counter Reset Request Resets the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change Request. * 1
0→1: Request Changes the operation information ID. The operation information to the ID is
1
1→0 : - displayed to System Info Value.* 1
Operation ID Operation information
1 Controller operating time
2 Laser excited time
3 Scanner operating time
System Info ID Change
8 101 Number of shutter operations
Request
Number of times the laser safety module has
102
been operated
201 Head temperature
202 Controller temperature
301 Results of the laser power calibration
302 Final execution result of the lens inspection

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-17

 Cyclic communication

Address bit Name Status Information Description

Setting String Read

8 Loads the settings.* 2
Request

Marked String Read Loads the marked content.* 2

9 0→1: Request
2 Request Sending the request before marking results in an error.
1→0 : -
Changes the content to be marked in the current job. Store the block no.
10 String Change Request in Request No., the string in Request Data, and the length of the string in
Request Data Size. The maximum data length is 250 bytes.

Sends communication commands. Store the communication command

8 Command Send Request in Request Data and the length of the string in Request Data Size. The
maximum data length is 250 bytes. Store the response in Response Data.

2
Loads the result of the XY tracking. Enter the XY tracking No. into the
XY Tracking Result 0→1: Request
3 9 Request No. Store the response in Response Data. Sending the request
Request 1→0 : -
before marking results in an error.

Loads the result of the Z tracking. Enter the Z tracking No. into Request No.
EtherNet/IP

Z Tracking Result
10 Store the response in Response Data. Sending the request before marking
Request
results in an error.

Disables the trigger input. If this bit turns on while marking, the trigger lock
0 Trigger Lock Request status is activated after all of the mark data is marked. Test marking and
sample marking is immediately canceled when this bit turns on.

Stops the laser radiation (the internal shutter remains open). Use this bit to
1 Operation Stop Request
stop the laser radiation at the desired position while processing a workpiece.

Stops the marking laser and the guide laser. The internal shutter closes while
2 Laser Stop Request
0: Input Off this bit is turned on.
4
1: Input On If the controller's internal clock passes midnight when this bit is turned on,
3 Date Hold Request the date of updated string is subtracted one day and the subtracted date is
marked.

Turns on an internal lighting.

4 Internal Lighting Request
* It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

Measurement Laser Stop Stops the displacement detecting laser.

5
Request * It cannot be used on the MD-X2050/400/450 series.

Marking Complete Bit

0 Resets Marking Complete and Start Marking Request Error.
Clear

Guide Laser Complete

1 Resets Guide Laser Complete and Guide Laser Request Error.
Bit Clear

Laser Stop Complete Bit

2 Resets Laser Stop Complete and Stop Marking Request Error.
Clear

Error Clear Complete Bit

3 0→1: Complete Clear Resets Error Clear Complete and Error Clear Request Error.
6 Clear
1→0 : -
Resets 2DC Read Complete and 2DC Read Request Error.
2DC Read Complete Bit
4 Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status and Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status is
Clear
also cleared at the same time.

Window Monitoring
5 Resets Window Monitoring Complete.
Complete Bit Clear

Job Edit Complete Bit

8 Resets Job Edit Complete and Job Edit Error.
Clear

Job Change Complete Bit

0 Resets Job Change Complete and Job Change Request Error.
Clear

Rank Change Complete

1 Resets Rank Change Complete and Rank Change Request Error.
Bit Clear

Counter No Change
2 Resets Counter No Complete and Counter No Change Request Error.
Complete Bit Clear

Counter Value Change

3 Resets Counter Value Complete and Counter Value Change Error.
Complete Bit Clear 0→1: Complete Clear
7
Counter Up Complete Bit 1→0 : -
4 Resets Counter Up Complete and Counter Up Request Error.
Clear

Counter Down Complete

5 Resets Counter Down Complete and Counter Down Request Error.
Bit Clear

Counter Reset Complete

6 Resets Counter Reset Complete and Counter Reset Request Error.
Bit Clear

System Info ID Change

8 Resets System Info ID Change Complete and System Info ID Change Error.
Complete Clear

Setting String Read

0 Resets Setting String Read Complete and Setting String Read Request Error.
Complete Bit Clear

Marked String Read 0→1: Complete Clear Resets Marked String Read Complete and Marked String Read Request
8 1
Complete Bit Clear 1→0 : - Error.

String Change Complete

2 Resets String Change Complete and String Change Request Error.
Bit Clear

2-18 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Cyclic communication

Address bit Name Status Information Description

Command Send
8 Resets Command Send Complete and Command Send Request Error.
Complete Bit Clear
0→1: Complete Clear
9 Resets XY Tracking Result Read Complete, Z Tracking Result Read
3-Axis Tracking Result 1→0 : -
9 Complete, 3-Axis Tracking OK Status, 3-Axis Tracking NG Status, XY
Read Complete Bit Clear
Tracking Result Request Error, and Z Tracking Result Request Error.

* 1 Turns on this bit after storing the job No., I/O specified character No., counter No., and operation information No. in the applicable Request No.
* 2 If you turn on this bit after storing the block No. in Request No., the content will be loaded from the specified block in the current job. Store
the load result in Response Data.

Word area for writing a PLC request

In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The detailed information of the request from the PLC is written.
2

EtherNet/IP
Address Data Type Name Status Information Description

10/11 DWord Request No Numbers (Four bytes) Stores the job No., block No., and counter No. to be changed.

12 Word Request Data Size Data size (Two bytes) Stores the data length of “Request Data” in 16-bit binary data.

Use for String Change Request and Command Send Request. Store
the change string and communication command data. Headers and
Command function
delimiters are not required.
(Default: 250 bytes)
13 to 137 Character Request Data * Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on the
* Selectable from 32, 64, 128, and
PLC settings. (Default: 250 bytes.)
252 bytes on the PLC.
However, even if 252 bytes is selected, the maximum amount of
data that can be sent is 250 bytes.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-19

 Cyclic communication

Command communications
Control via the command communication can also be made when using EtherNet/IP.
Since the communication mode is “command/response type”, multiple commands cannot be sent simultaneously. Therefore, make sure to send the
command only after a response has been received.

zz
Communication format
Header and delimiter settings are not required.
Store the send data size in “Request Data Size” and the send data in “Request Data” in the PLC command area. Then set the “Command Send Request”
bit to “1” to enable the stored data to be sent to the controller.
For further details of the communication command, refer to “Chapter 1 Communication Interface” (Page 1-1) .

2 When “Request” bit does NOT work

If a request is turned on but does not work, check the communications history.
You can check the history of commands sent and received between the PLC and laser marker in the Marking Builder Plus communications history.
EtherNet/IP

zz
Confirmation method
Start Marking Builder Plus, and select the [Maintenance] tab > [Communication] > [Communication History].
The [Communication History] window appears. Click the [Update] button to display the latest history.

If the communication history is empty, the laser marker has not received any communication.
Double check the communication settings between the laser marker and the PLC, and make sure that the HUB and cable are not defective.

zz
Request format
Each request will be stored in the communication history in the following format:
Command: ***** Request
Response: ***** Request,X (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
However, the requests below have a different format. (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
Request History format (“>” = command; “<” = response)

> 2DC_Read_Request,0
2DC Read Request
< 2DC_Read_Request,X,[Grade],[Content]

> Job_Edit_Start_Request,[Job No]

Job Edit Start Request
< Job_Edit_Start_Request,X

> Job_Change_Request,[Job No]

Job Change Request
< Job_Change_Request,X

> Rank_Change_Request,[I/O Character No]

Rank Change Request
< Rank_Change_Request,X

> Counter_No_Change_Request,,[Counter No],1

Counter No Change Request
< Counter_No_Change_Request,X,[Counter Current Value]

> Counter_Value_Change_Request,,[Counter No],[Counter Current Value]

Counter Value Change Request
< Counter_Value_Change_Request,X

> System_Info_ID_Change_Request,[System_Info_ID]
System Info ID Change Request
< System_Info_ID_Change_Request,X

> Setting_String_Read_Request,BLK=[Block No],CharacterString

Setting String Read Request
< Setting_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]

> Marked_String_Read_Request,MarkedCharacter=[Job No],[Block No]

Marked String Read Request
< Marked_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]

> String_Change_Request,,[Block No],[Character String]

String Change Request
< String_Change_Request,X

> Window_Monitoring_Request
Window Monitoring Request
< Window_Monitoring_Request,[OK/NG], [Score]

> XY_Tracking_Result_Request,0
XY_Tracking_Result_Request < XY_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [X Coordinate Gap Amount], [Y Coordinate Gap Amount], [θ Gap Amount], [Correlation
Value], [Execution Time], [Result]

> Z_Tracking_Result_Request
Z_Tracking_Result_Request < Z_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [Z Coordinate Gap Amount], [X Rotation Angle], [Y Rotation Angle], [Stability], [Execution
Time], [Result]

> [Stored data for Request Data]

Command Send Request
< [Response]

An error may be the cause of the request not working. You can check up to two error codes simultaneously, Error Code 1 and Error Code 2.
Error details and resolutions are listed in the User's Manual for the applicable model.

2-20 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Ladder Program Example

Ladder Program Example

KEYENCE KV Series Program Example
This chapter introduces an example of a ladder program for controlling the laser marker using the KV series. The data memory numbers are described
based on the default values of KV-5500/7500. Modify the numbers as necessary according to your environment.

Changing the job No. and starting the marking (An example of bit control)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Timing chart

Ready Status 2

EtherNet/IP
Request No

Job Change Request

Job Change Complete

Start Marking Request

Marking Complete 2

Marking Complete /
Job Change Complete Bit
Clear

• “Ready Status” becomes OFF and the “Busy” bit

becomes ON while the job No. switching is in progress.
• If the job No. switching fails, “Job Change Request
Error” will become ON.
• “Job Change Complete” retains its ON status until “Job
Change Complete Clear” becomes ON or until “Job
zz
Sequence Change Request” becomes ON again.
• “Marking Complete” retains its ON status until “Marking
(1) If Ready Status is ON at the rising edge of MR000, Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until “Marking
transfer job No.”0” to Request No. Request” becomes ON again.
End the sequence if Ready Status is OFF. • The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
(2) Execute Job Change Request after the completion of communication time interval (RPI).
sequence (1).
A switch is made to job No.0.
(3) When Job Change Complete becomes ON, Start
Marking Request is set to ON.
The marking process starts.
(4) When Marking Complete2 becomes ON, Job Change
Complete Bit Clear and Marking Complete Bit Clear are
set to ON.
The completion flag is cleared.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-21

 Ladder Program Example

Changing the string (An example of bit control)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Timing chart

Ready Status

Request Data No

Request Data Size

2
Request Data

String Change Request

EtherNet/IP

String Change Complete

String Change Complete Bit

Clear

• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while a

string is being changed.
• If changing the string fails, the [String Change Request
Error] will turn on.
• “String Change Complete” will not become OFF until
“String Change Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until
“String Change Request” becomes ON again.
zz
Sequence • The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).
(1) Perform the following at the rising edge of MR001:
• Transfer the block No. “0” to Request No.
• Transfer “8” to Request Data size
• Transfer “MD-X2000” to Request Data

The character string data needs to arrange the order

(endian) according to the CIP rules. By the RCPSASC
command of KVSeries convert the character string
stored in “DM100” into the CIP character string type
data, and store the converted data in “W092(Request
Data Size)”*, and store the converted data size in
“DM200”.
* The character string data length is stored in
“W092(Request Data Size)” and “W093(Request
Data (0))”.

If Ready Status is ON, perform String Change Request.

The command for changing the string of block No.0 to “MD-X2000”
will be sent.
(2) When String Change Complete becomes ON, String
Change Complete Bit Clear is set to ON.
The completion flag is cleared.

2-22 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Ladder Program Example

Sending a command (An example of command communication)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Timing chart

Ready Status

Request Data Size

Request Data

2
Command Send Request

Command Send Complete

EtherNet/IP
Response Data Size

Response Data

• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while

a string is being changed via sending communication
commands.
• “Command Send Request Error” turns ON when the
zz
Sequence command sending fails.
• “Command Send Complete” will not become OFF until
(1) Perform the following at the rising edge of MR002: “Command Send Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or
• Transfer the number of sent bytes “29” to Request Data Size until “Command Send Request” becomes ON again.
• Transfer “WX,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC” to Request Data • The response to “Command Send Request” stores the
data length in “Response Data Size” and data content in
• For further details of the communication command, “Response Data”.
refer to “Chapter 1 Communication Interface” • The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
(Page 1-1). communication time interval (RPI).
• The send data needs to arrange the order (endian)
according to the CIP rules. By the RCPSASC
command of KV Series, convert the character string
(“WX,BLK=000,CharacterString=ABC”) stored in
“DM1000” into the CIP character string type data,
and store the converted data in “W092(Request
Data Size)”*, and store the data size after being
converted into “DM2000”.
* The character string data length is stored in
“W092(Request Data Size)” and “W093(Request
Data (0))”.

If Ready Status is ON at the rising edge of MR002, perform

Command Send Request, and the command to change the
character string of block No. 0 to “ABC” will be sent.
(2) When Command Send Complete becomes ON, store
Response Data in the data memory “DM3000”.
Once the command communication ends, the received
data will be stored in “W012 (Response Data Size)” and
“W013 (Response Data)”.
The received data likewise needs to arrange the order
(endian). By using the CPSASC command of KV Series
convert the “W012 (Response Data Size)” and “W013
(Response Data)” into the converted data in DM3000.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-23

 Ladder Program Example

OMRON PLC CJ2 Series Program Example

This chapter introduces an example of a ladder program for controlling the laser marker using the CJ2 series. The data memory numbers are described
based on the default values of CJ2 series. Modify the numbers as necessary according to your environment.

Changing the job No. and starting the marking (An example of bit control)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Timing chart

Ready Status

2 Request No

Job Change Request

EtherNet/IP

Job Change Complete

Start Marking Request

Marking Complete 2

Marking Complete /
zz
Sequence Job Change Complete Bit
Clear
(1) If Ready Status is ON at the rising edge of 0.01,
transfer job No.”1” to Request No. • “Ready Status” becomes OFF and the “Busy” bit
End the sequence if Ready Status is OFF. becomes ON while the job No. switching is in progress.
• If the job No. switching fails, “Job Change Request
(2) Execute Job Change Request after the completion of
Error” will become ON.
sequence (1). • “Job Change Complete” retains its ON status until “Job
A switch is made to job No.1. Change Complete Clear” becomes ON or until “Job
(3) Set Start Marking Request at the rising edge of 0.02 to Change Request” becomes ON again.
ON . • “Marking Complete” retains its ON status until “Marking
The marking process starts. Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until “Marking
Request” becomes ON again.
(4) Set Job Change Complete Bit Clear at the rising edge • The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
of 0.03, and set Marking Complete Bit Clear at the communication time interval (RPI).
rising edge of 0.04 to ON.
The completion flag is cleared.

2-24 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Ladder Program Example

Changing the string (An example of bit control)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Sequence
(1) Input “KEYENCE” in D2000 at the rising edge of 1.01.
(2) Detect the character string length of D2000 at the
rising edge of 1.02.
(3) Divide the detected character string length by 2 at the
rising edge of 1.03 (2), and detect the memory count
which is going to store the character data.
(4) Perform the following at the rising edge of 1.04:
• Transfer the character data “KEYENCE” to Request Data
• Byte swap the Request Data. 2
The send data needs to arrange the order (endian)

EtherNet/IP
according to the CIP rules. By the SWAP command of
CJ2 Series convert the character string (“KEYENCE”)
stored in “D3000” into the CIP character string type
data, and store the converted data in “D13 (Request
Data Size)”.

(5) Perform the following at the rising edge of 1.05:

• Store the block No. “0” to be changed to Request No.
• Store the character string length “7” to Request Data size
• Set String Change Request to ON.

zz
Timing chart

Ready Status

Request Data No

Request Data Size

Request Data

String Change Request

String Change Complete

String Change Complete Bit

Clear

• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while a

string is being changed.
• If changing the string fails, the [String Change Request
Error] will turn on.
• “String Change Complete” will not become OFF until
“String Change Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until
“String Change Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-25

 Ladder Program Example

Sending a command (An example of command communication)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Sequence
(1) Input “WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X” in D3000 at the
rising edge of 2.01.
* In the reference ladder, part of it is omitted.
(2) Detect the character string length of D3000 at the rising
edge of 2.02.
(3) Divide the detected character string length by 2 at the
rising edge of 2.03 (2), and detect the memory count which

2
is going to store the character data.
(4) Perform the following at the rising edge of 2.04:
• Transfer the character data “WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X” to
Request Data
EtherNet/IP

• Byte swap the Request Data.

• For details on commands, refer to “Communication

Interface Manual”.
• The send data needs to arrange the order
(endian) according to the CIP rules. By the SWAP
command of CJ2 Series convert the character string
(“WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X”) stored in “D3000”
into the CIP character string type data, and store the
converted data in “D13 (Request Data Size)”.

(5) Perform the following at the rising edge of 2.05:

• Store the character string length “29” to Request Data size
• Set the Bit of Command Send Request to ON.

zz
Timing chart

Ready Status

Request Data Size

Request Data

Command Send Request

Command Send Complete

Command Send Complete

Bit Clear

• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while

a string is being changed via sending communication
commands.
• “Command Send Request Error” turns ON when the
command sending fails.
• “Command Send Complete” will not become OFF until
“Command Send Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or
until “Command Send Request” becomes ON again.
• The response to “Command Send Request” stores the
data length in “Response Data Size” and data content in
“Response Data”.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).

2-26 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Ladder Program Example

Studio 5000 Logix Designer Ladder Program Example

This chapter introduces an example of an RSLogix5000 ladder program for controlling the laser marker using an Allen-Bradley Compact/Control Logix
PLC.

Changing the job No. and starting the Changing the string (An example of bit
marking (An example of bit control) control)

zz
Reference ladder zz
Reference ladder

EtherNet/IP
zz
Sequence
(1) Turn ON ChangeJob.
If Job Change Complete is OFF and Ready Status is ON, “1” is
stored in Request No.
(2) Execute Job Change Request after the completion of
(1).
A switch is made to job No.1.
(3) If Job Change Complete becomes ON, Start Marking zz
Sequence
Request are set to ON.
The marking process starts. (1) If String Change Complete is OFF and Ready Status
is ON when ChangeString turns ON, the following
(4) When Marking Complete2 turns ON, the Job Change
occurs:
Complete Bit Clear and Marking Complete Bit Clear are
• The length of the new string “5” is moved to Request Data Size
turned ON. • The Block Number “0” is moved to Request No
zz
Timing chart • The new string “ABCDE” is moved to Request Data (Addresses
13 to 17)
• String Change Request turns ON
Ready Status
(2) When String Change Complete turns ON, the String
Change Complete Bit Clear turns ON.
Request No

zz
Timing chart
Job Change Request
Ready Status

Job Change Complete

Request No

Start Marking Request

Request Data Size

Marking Complete 2
Request Data

Marking Complete /Job

Change Complete Bit Clear String Change Request

• “Ready Status” becomes OFF and the “Busy” bit String Change Complete
becomes ON while the job No. switching is in progress.
• If the job No. switching fails, “Job Change Request
String Change Complete Bit
Error” will become ON. Clear
• “Job Change Complete” retains its ON status until “Job
Change Complete Clear” becomes ON or until “Job
Change Request” becomes ON again.
Marking Complete2 remains ON until Marking Complete • “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while a
Bit Clear turns ON or until Marking Request turns ON string is being changed.
again. • If changing the string fails, the [String Change Request
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic Error] will turn on.
communication time interval (RPI). • “String Change Complete” will not become OFF until
“String Change Complete Bit Clear” becomes ON or until
“String Change Request” becomes ON again.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 2-27

 Ladder Program Example

Sending a command (An example of

command communication)

zz
Reference ladder

2
EtherNet/IP

zz
Sequence
(1) If Command Send Complete is OFF and Ready Status
is ON when SendCommand turns ON, the following
occurs:
• The length of the command string “29” is moved to Request Data
Size
• The command string “WX,BLK=0,CharacterString=MD-X” is
moved to Request Data (Addresses 13 to 41)
• Command Send Request turns ON
(2) When Command Send Complete turns ON, the
following occurs:
• The Response Data Size “5” is moved to CommandResponse.
LEN
• The Response Data “WX,OK” is moved to CommandResponse.
DATA (Addresses 0 to 4)
• Command Send Complete Bit Clear turns ON.

zz
Timing chart

Ready Status

Request Data Size

Request Data

Command Send Request

Command Send Request

Complete

Command Send Request

Complete Bit Clear

• “Ready” becomes OFF and “Busy” becomes ON while

a string is being changed via sending communication
commands.
• “Command Send Request Error” turns ON when the
command sending fails.
• “Command Send Complete” will not turn OFF until
“Command Send Complete Bit Clear” turns ON or until
“Command SendRequest” turns ON again.
• The response to “Command Send Request” stores the
data length in “Response Data Size” and data content in
“Response Data”.
• The request bit should be ON for longer than the cyclic
communication time interval (RPI).

2-28 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 3
PROFINET

PROFINET
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Outline of the control by PROFINET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Devices compatible with PROFINET communication. . . 3-2
Communication Specification of the Controller. . . 3-3
Basic specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Status of device assignment of
the MD information area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Command communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Other controller specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
When “Request” bit does NOT work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Setup Procedure of PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Connection Procedure for PROFINET. . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Setup of PROFINET Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Controlling the Laser Marker Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Execute Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Download the created ladder program on the PLC. . . . 3-22
Confirm/monitor the state of laser marker. . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-1

 Getting Started

Getting Started
Outline of the control by PROFINET
The MD-X2000/2500 series supports communication with PROFINET. PROFINET is an open communication standard defined by the PROFIBUS
& PROFINET International, which allows any compatible devices to communicate regardless of their manufactures. This system complies with the
Conformance Class A.

Operation Flow
Confirm the Specification
“Communication Specification of the Controller” (Page 3-3)

• Check if PROFINET supports the PLC to be connected.

3
• Check the device map of the input/output data.
PROFINET

Changing the PROFINET Setup Procedure

“Setup Procedure of PROFINET” (Page 3-13)

Set this product for connection with PROFINET.

Major setting items: IP address of this product and PROFINET device name

Establishing PROFINET communication

“Setup of PROFINET Communication” (Page 3-14)

• To register the laser marker information on the PLC, use the GSDML file that the laser marker model uses.
• After the PROFINET connection has been successfully established, the LINK LED (green) of the Ethernet port of the controller starts
blinking.

Performing the necessary processing

“Controlling the Laser Marker Controller” (Page 3-19)

Data I/O
• The laser marker information will be assigned to the PLC device and the status of the laser marker will be written to the MD information
area (Page 3-4) on the PLC.
• The laser marker information will be assigned to the PLC device and the laser marker controller is controlled by writing data to the MD
instruction area (Page 3-9) on the PLC.

Command control (Page 10)

The communication commands can be executed and several settings such as the marking parameter can be edited.
“Command communications” (Page 3-11)

Devices compatible with PROFINET communication

For details of the PLC setup, refer to “Connection Procedure for PROFINET” (Page 3-14) and the instruction manuals provided with the PLC.

zz
PLCs from Siemens
PLC PROFINET Communication
Firmware versions Software to be used Versions of software to be used
model units

S7-300 Built-in V2.6 of later STEP 7 V5.5.0.0 SP 2 or later

S7-400 Built-in V5.3 of later STEP 7 V5.5.0.0 SP 2 or later

S7-1200 Built-in V2.0 of later STEP 7 Basic Version V13 SP1

S7-1500 Built-in V2.0 of later STEP7 Professional Version V13 or later

3-2 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Communication Specification of the Controller

Basic specification
PROFINET communication of this system supports “periodic communication.”
When performing periodic communication using PROFINET, the laser marker functions are assigned to the PLC device. Use the functions assigned to
each device depending on the purpose. Either a straight or crossover LAN cable can be used.

Periodic communication
The periodic communication performs communication periodically (at an interval of few msec. to several dozens of msec.), which is suitable for real-time
control. The update time and communication size depend on the connection settings on the PLC side.
For details, refer to “Connection Procedure for PROFINET” (Page 3-14).

PROFINET
PLC MD-X2000/2500 series

MD information area
MD information area
Controller
Controller status
information
Error status
Error status
Busy status
Busy status
Reading result Communication Reading result
cycle
Configured
on the PLC side
PLC specified area PLC specified area

Marking instruction Marking instruction

Reading instruction Reading instruction

Command Command
instruction instruction

• Read the “Safety Information” in the user's manual for the applicable model to perform operation in the state that the safety
is secured by using security function even when the network failure occurs.
• Confirm the safe operation by considering the communication delay due to the communication time or network overload
state.

• Set the communication interval to 8 msec. or longer.

• The processing may be delayed or the communication may be disconnected by temporary timeout due to the excessive
temporary or continuous load, caused by simultaneous communication functions. In this case, the periodic communication
settings and use condition need to be reviewed. Be sure to check problems in the operating performance before entering
production.
• Networks having many connected devices including a PROFINET device could cause delay and packet loss when the networks
are largely overloaded routinely/temporally. Validate the system thoroughly before operation.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-3

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Status of device assignment of the MD information area

In the device, there is an area for “writing laser marker state to the PLC” and an area for “writing instructions from the PLC to the laser marker”. It is
divided into “bit area” and “word area”.

Bit area for writing laser marker state on the PLC

In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The laser marker information is written in the PLC bit area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Slot Size Module Address bit Name Status Information Description

Displays the ready status. When the device status is Ready, operations
0: Not Ready such as start marking, job change, and character string change are
0 Ready Status accepted
1: Ready
Linked I/O Terminal Trigger ready output

Displays the error (E***) status. To recover from an error, eliminate the

3
0: Not Error causes of the error first, and then turn on Error Clear.
1 Error Status
1: Error
Linked I/O Terminal Error output

0: Not Warning Displays the warning error (W***) status.

2 Warning Status
PROFINET

1: Warning Linked I/O Terminal Warning output

0
0: Not I/O Error
3 I/O Error Status Displays the terminal block error (T***) status.
1: I/O Error

0: Open Shutter Displays whether the internal shutter is opened or closed.

4 Shutter Status
1: Close Shutter Linked I/O Terminal Shutter status output

0: No Connection
5 Network Status Displays the Fieldbus network communication status.
1: Connection

0: Not Ready Displays the job switching ready status.

6 Job Change Ready Status
1: Ready Linked I/O Terminal Job switching ready status

0: Laser Not Excited Displays the laser excitation status.

0 Laser Emitted Status
1: Laser Excited Linked I/O Terminal Laser excitation status output

0: OFF (Close)
1 Shutter Control Status Displays whether the shutter control input is on or off.
1: ON (Open)

0: OFF (Close)
2 Remote Interlock Status Displays whether the remote interlock input is on or off.
1: ON (Open)

1 Displays whether the laser safety module control input is on or off.

Laser Safety Module 0: OFF (Close)
3 Displays the status where the laser emission stops when it is “1 (ON)”.
Status 1: ON (Open)
When the laser safety module (MD-C1) is not mounted, it is always “0”.
Machine
0 4
Status Displays whether the logging trigger input is on or off.
0: OFF
4 Logging Trigger Status
1: ON Linked I/O Terminal Logging trigger input

External Lighting Control 0: OFF Displays whether the external lighting control output is on or off.
5
Status 1: ON Linked I/O Terminal External Lighting Control Output

If one or more of the following busy statuses are on, Busy Status turns
on.
Marking Busy, Guide Laser Busy, Job Change Busy,
0 Busy Status
Commmunication Priority, Job Edit Busy,
Mark Cheeck/2DC Read Busy Status,
Window Monitoring Busy

Turns on during marking (including laser inspection).

1 Marking Busy Status
Linked I/O Terminal Output During Marking

Turns on when guide laser marking is in operation (including the

2 Guide Laser Busy Status distance pointer).

Linked I/O Terminal Guide Laser Output

0: Not Busy Turns on when a job is being deployed.

2 3 Job Change Busy Status
1: Busy (Deployment timing: when changing marking jobs, content, and so on)

Displays the communication priority status. Turns on when the laser

Communication Priority
4 marker is connected to an external control device and in the no priority
Error Status
state.

Turns on when the Job Edit Start Request turns on and editing starts.
5 Job Edit Busy Status Returns to “OFF” when the Job Edit Start Request is turned off and
editing is completed.

Mark Check /2DC Read Turns on when the marking verification function or 2DC reading is
6
Busy Status operating.

Turns on during the lens inspection. This not only turns on when the
Window Monitoring Busy operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications, but
7
Status also when this operation is started by another communication and
before or after marking.

3-4 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Slot Size Module Address bit Name Status Information Description

0 Trigger Lock Status Displays whether the trigger lock input is on or off.

1 Operation Stop Status Displays whether the processing operation stop input is on or off.

2 Laser Control Status Displays whether the laser stop input is on or off.
0: OFF
0 3 Date Hold Status Displays whether the date hold input is on or off.
1: ON

4 Internal Lighting Status Displays whether the internal lighting control input is on or off.

Measurement Laser Stop Displays whether the displacement detecting laser stop input is on or
5
Status off.

0: OFF Displays the status of date attach output.

0 Date Attach Status
1: ON Linked I/O Terminal Date attach output

1 Counter End1 Status

Displays the status of counter end output 1 - 4. You can use the
2 Counter End2 Status 0: Not Complete Controller settings of the Marking Builder Plus to assign the individual
1: Complete and common counters (0 to 9, A to J).
3 Counter End3 Status

4 Counter End4 Status

0→1: OK
1→0: -
Linked I/O Terminal

assessment result is OK or not.* 1

Counter end output 1 - 4

Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade 3

Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment

PROFINET
Mark Check/2DC Read OK result of the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark
5 [Reset timing]
Status1 Check/2DC Read OK Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
1 Reset when 2DC Read
Request or 2DC Read communication setting screen.
Complete Bit Clear turns on.
Linked I/O Terminal Marking/2D code check OK output

Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade

0→1: NG assessment result is OK or not.* 1
1→0: - Displays the 2D code grade result by default, and the assessment
Mark Check/2DC Read NG result of the marking verification function will be displayed in Mark
6 [Reset timing] Check/2DC Read OK Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
Function Status1
1 4 Reset when 2DC Read communication setting screen.
Status Request or 2DC Read
Complete Bit Clear turns on. Marking/2D code check NG
Linked I/O Terminal
output

Displays the status of marking complete output.

0: Not Complete
7 Marking Complete 1
1: Complete Linked I/O Terminal Marking complete output

Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade

0→1: OK
assessment result is OK or not.* 1
1→0: -
Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade
Mark Check/2DC Read OK assessment result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark
0 [Reset timing]
Status 2 Check/2DC Read OK Status 1. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
Reset when 2DC Read
Request or 2DC Read communication setting screen.
Complete Bit Clear turns on.
Linked I/O Terminal Marking/2D code check OK output

Displays whether the marking verification function or 2D code grade

0→1: NG assessment result is OK or not.* 1
1→0: - Displays the marking verification result by default, and the grade
Mark Check/2DC Read NG assessment result of the 2D code will be displayed in Mark
1 [Reset timing] Check/2DC Read NG Status 1. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
Status 2
Reset when 2DC Read communication setting screen.
2 Request or 2DC Read
Complete Bit Clear turns on. Marking/2D code check NG
Linked I/O Terminal
output

Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking

function, or when succeeding the tracking. Turns on by AND condition
0→1: OK
2 3-Axis Tracking OK Status when using multiple tracking settings.
1→0: -
Linked I/O Terminal 3-Axis Tracking OK Output

Turns on for a fixed time when using the XY tracking/Z tracking

function, or when failing the tracking. Turns on by AND condition when
0→1: NG
3 3-Axis Tracking NG Status using multiple tracking settings.
1→0: -
Linked I/O Terminal 3-Axis Tracking NG Output

Displays the completion status of marking started with Start Marking

0 Marking Complete 2 Request.
If marking has been canceled, it does not turn on.* 2

Displays the completion status of guide laser marking started with

1 Guide Laser Complete Guide Laser Request. If completed, regardless of how it was canceled,
0: Not Complete be it communications, I/O, or the like, it turns on.* 2
1: Complete
Displays the completion status of Stop Marking Request. Even if
Completion 2 Laser Stop Complete marking is started from other communications or I/O, if cancellation is
2 8 0 [Reset timing]
Status completed with Stop Marking Request, the bit turns on.
Reset when the Complete
Clear Bit statuses turn on or
Displays the completion status of Error Clear Request. After
the next Request turns on.
3 Error Clear Complete completion, it turns on, regardless of whether error clearing was
successful or not.* 2

4 2DC Read Complete Displays the completion status of 2DC Read Request.* 2

Window Monitoring
5
Complete
* Turns on when completing the lens inspection.* 2

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-5

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Slot Size Module Address bit Name Status Information Description

Displays the completion status of editing started with Job Edit Start
1 0 Job Edit Complete
Request. If it completes successfully, the bit turns on.

0 Job Change Complete Displays the completion status of Job Change Request.* 2

1 Rank Change Complete Displays the completion status of Rank Change Request.* 2

2 Counter No Complete Displays the completion status of Counter No Change Request.* 2

3 Counter Value Complete Displays the completion status of Counter Value Change Request.* 2

Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter Up

2 4 Counter Up Complete
Request.* 2

Displays the completion status of the value changed with Counter

5 Counter Down Complete Down Request.
0: Not Complete *2
1: Complete Displays the completion status of the reset with Counter Reset
Completion 6 Counter Reset Complete
[Reset timing]
Request.
2 8
Status *2
Reset when the Complete

3
System Info ID Change Clear Bit statuses turn on or Displays the changing completion of the operation information ID by
3 0 the next Request turns on.
Complete System Info ID Change Request.

Setting String Read Displays the completion status of Setting String Read Request.
0
Complete *2
PROFINET

4 Marked String Read Displays the completion status of Marked String Read Request.
1
Complete *2

2 String Change Complete Displays the completion status of String Change Request.* 2

0 Command Send Complete Displays the completion status of Command Send Request.* 2

XY Tracking Result Read

1 Display the completion status of XY Tracking Result Request.* 2
7 Complete

Z Tracking Result Read

2 Display the completion status of Z Tracking Result Request.* 2
Complete

If the marking operation started with Start Marking Request fails, the bit
Start Marking Request turns on.
0
Error If marking is canceled or marking cannot start without priority, it turns
on.* 3

0: Not Error If the guide laser operation started with Guide Laser Request fails, the
1 Guide Laser Request Error 1: Error bit turns on. If Guide Laser Request is turned on when the guide laser
cannot be irradiated or cannot be started without priority, it turns on.* 3
0 [Reset timing]
Stop Marking Request Reset when the Complete Bit
2 If a Stop Marking Request fails to stop marking, the bit turns on.* 3
Error Clear statuses turn on or the
next Request turns on.
3 Error Clear Request Error If an Error Clear Request fails to clear the error, it turns on.* 3

4 2DC Read Request Error If a 2DC Read Request fails to read a 2D code, the bit turns on.

Window Monitoring If a Window Monitoring Request fails in the lens inspection operation, it
5
Request Error turns on.* 3

0: Not Error
1: Error

[Reset timing] If a Job Edit Start Request fails to edit the job, it turns on.* If edit start
1 0 Job Edit Error is not received or if data cannot be deployed when editing finishes, the
Reset when Job Edit
Complete Bit Clear turns on bit turns on.
or the next Job Edit Start
Request turns on.

Error Status 0 Job Change Request Error If a job change with a Job Change Request fails, it turns on.* 3
3 8
Bits
Rank Change Request If an I/O specified character change with a Rank Change Request fails,
1
Error it turns on.* 3

Counter No Change If a number change with a Counter No Change Request fails, the bit
2
Request Error turns on.* 3
0: Not Error
Counter Value Change If a value change with a Counter Value Change Request fails, the bit
3 1: Error
Request Error turns on.* 3
2 [Reset timing]
If a value change with a Counter Up Request fails, it turns on.* 3
4 Counter Up Request Error Reset when the Complete Bit
Receivable condition: Ready ON
Clear statuses turn on or the
Counter Down Request next Request turns on. If a value change with a Counter Down Request fails, it turns on.* 3
5
Error Receivable condition: Ready ON

Counter Reset Request If a reset with a Counter Reset Request fails, it turns on.* 3
6
Error Receivable condition: Ready ON

System Info ID Change If a change of the operation information ID with a System Info ID
7
Error Change Request fails, it turns on.* 3

Setting String Read 0: Not Complete

0 If reading with a Setting String Read Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Request Error 1: Complete
Marked String Read
4 1 [Reset timing] If reading with a Marked String Read Request fails, the bit turns on.* 3
Request Error Reset when the Complete Bit
String Change Request Clear statuses turn on or the If a change with a String Change Request fails, the bit turns on.
2 next Request turns on.
Error It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3

3-6 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Slot Size Module Address bit Name Status Information Description

Command Send Request 0: Not Error If Command Send Request fails, the bit turns on.
7 0
Error 1: Error It will also fail if the data length exceeds 250 bytes.* 3

Error Status XY Tracking Result

3 8 8 1 [Reset timing] When XY Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Bits Request Error Reset when the Complete Bit
Z Tracking Result Request Clear statuses turn on or the
9 2 next Request turns on. When Z Tracking Result Request fails, it turns on.* 3
Error

* 1 If a code is read with the settable 2D code reading function on Marking Builder Plus, OK/NG is output with the grade that is set as the
threshold as the reference.
If code is read with 2DC Read Request, OK/NG is output for whether the code was successfully read or not.
(If the code is read even at Grade F, OK is output.)
* 2 The bit turns on at completion only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications.
If you start the operation with other forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if the operation completes.
The bit turns on when complete only if the operation is started by Profinet and Ethernet/IP communications.
* 3 If you started the operation with other forms of communication or I/O, the bit will not turn on, even if an error occurs.

Remote interlock input, shutter interlock input, and laser excitement input cannot be controlled from Profinet. Control those inputs from I/O.
3

PROFINET

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-7

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Word area for writing laser marker state on the PLC

In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The laser marker information is written in the PLC word area via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Slot Size Module Address Data Type Name Status Information Description

Displays the number for the error currently occurring. The error number
Word Error Code 1 display differs to the normal display.
The error codes are displayed as four digits such as 1*** for an error
Error Number
(E***), 2*** for a warning error (W***), and 3*** for an I/O error (T***).
Word Error Code 2 Up to two errors can be displayed. When three or more errors occur,
check them with Marking Builder Plus.

4 8 Error Codes 0 Error Number

[Reset timing]
If Command Send Request fails due to a software error, the error
Command Send Reset when Command
Word number is displayed. The error number display differs to the normal
Error Status Send Request Complete Bit
display. A software error (S***) is displayed as 4*** in four digits.
Clear turns on or the next
Command Send Request

3
turns on.
Job Number
Word Job No Status Displays the currently selected job number.
(0 to 1999)

• Counter Value Change/Up/Down/Reset Request that is to be

changed
PROFINET

Counter Number
Word Counter No Status
(0 to 19)
• Counter Value Status that is to be displayed
Displays the number of the target counter listed above.
Changes with Counter No Change Request.
Operate Counter Value Counter Value Displays the current counter value set to be displayed for Counter No
5 16 0 DWord
Parameter Status (0 to 4294967295) Change Request.
I/O Encoded Character Value
Word Rank Value Status Displays the value for I/O specified characters.
(0 to 35)
System Info ID
Word System Info ID Displays the currently selected operation information ID.
(0 to 301)
System Info Value
DWord System Info Value Displays the operation information specified by System Info ID.
(0 to 4294967295)
Any of the following are displayed:
[When acquiring 2DC reading] • 2D code reading (Defaults) : Read fail of AIM DPM comprehensive
0 to 4 determination grade or F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/
B(3)/A(4)
[When using the marking
verification function] • Marking verification function : score
Marking Check Displays the 2D code result by default, and the assessment result of
000 to 100
Word Score/2DC Read the marking verification function will be displayed in Marking Check
Grade Status 1 [Reset timing] Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in
Resets when 2DC Read the communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Complete Bit Clear turns on When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade, even if you
or the next 2DC Read started the operation with communications and I/O other than 2DC
Request turns on. Read Request, the result is displayed after the operation is completed.
When reading multiple numbers of codes, displays the minimum value.
Displays the execution count of the 2D code reading or the execution
0 to 65535 count of the marking verification functions. Displays the execution
Marking Check/2DC
count of the 2D code reading by default, and the execution count of the
Word Read Total Count [Reset timing]
marking verification functions will be displayed in Marking Check/2DC
Marking Status 1 It will be reset to “0” when the
Read Total Count Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the
Check/2D power is turned off.
6 8 0 communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Code Read
Result [When using the marking Any of the following are displayed:
verification function] • Marking verification function (defaults) : score
000 to 100 • 2D code reading : Read fail of AIM DPM comprehensive
determination grade or F(0)/D(1)/C(2)/B(3)/A(4)
[When acquiring 2DC reading] Displays the result of the marking verification function by default, and
Marking Check
0 to 4 the grade result of the 2D code reading will be displayed in Marking
Word Score/2DC Read
Check Score/2DC Read Grade Status 2. Status 1 and 2 can be
Grade Status 2 [Reset timing] reversed in the communication setting screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Reset when 2DC Read When displaying the result of the 2D code reading grade, even if you
Complete Bit Clear turns started the operation with communications and I/O other than 2DC
on or the next 2DC Read Read Request, the result is displayed after the operation is completed.
Request turns on. When reading multiple numbers of codes, displays the minimum value.
Displays the execution count of the marking verification function or the
0 to 65535 execution count of the 2D code reading. Displays the execution count
Marking Check/2DC
of the marking verification function by default, and the execution count
Word Read Total Count [Reset timing]
of the 2D code reading in Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Status
Status 2 It will be reset to “0” when the
1. Status 1 and 2 can be reversed in the communication setting screen
power is turned off.
of Marking Builder Plus.
Count Result Total Marking Count Marking Count
7 4 0 DWord Displays the marking count.
Data Status (0 to 4294967295)
Response Data Data size
0 Word Stores the data length of “Response Data” in 16-bit binary data.
Size (2 bytes)
Displays the response data for the Setting/Marked String Request, 2DC
Response Read Request (read content), Command Send Request, XY Tracking
2+
Response Result Request, and Z Tracking Result Request.
8 data
Data [Reset timing]
size 2 Character Response Data * Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on the
Reset when each Complete PLC settings. (Default: 128 bytes.) However, if the response data
Bit Clear request turns on or is greater than the selected byte number, all the data cannot be
the next Request turns on. received. Additionally, even if 252 bytes is selected, the maximum
amount of data that will be received is 250 bytes.

3-8 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Bit area for writing the request from the PLC onto the laser marker
In the following areas, information is divided by bit. The bit values are either 0 or 1.
The request from the PLC is written onto the laser marker via cyclic communication. An area without a description is reserved.
Slot Size Module Address bit Name Status Information Description
0→1: Start
1→0 : - Starts the marking.
If marking cannot be performed or is canceled, Start Marking Request
0 Start Marking Request [Condition of operation] Error turns on. The Marking Busy Status turns on during marking. If
The Ready Status is turned marking completes successfully, Marking Complete 1 and 2 turn on.
on.
Starts guide laser marking.
0→1: Start Enter the number into Request No. beforehand.
1→0 : -
0: Distance pointer 1: Guide laser once
[Condition of operation]
2: Guide laser continuously 3: Area frame
The Ready Status is turned
on. 4: Work image 5: Block frame
1 Guide Laser Request
* During shutter control,

3
contactor control, and If marking completes or is canceled (including canceled due to an error)
safety shutter control, the after a set amount of time, the Guide Laser Request Complete bit turns
request is received even if on. If guide laser marking cannot start, Guide Laser Request Error turns
the Ready Status is turned on.
off. If the move marking setting is selected, guide laser marking cannot be

PROFINET
used. The error bit turns on.
0→1: Stop
1→0 : -

0 2 Stop Marking Request Cancels marking.

[Condition of operation]
The Marking Busy Status is
turned on.

If an error occurs, remove the cause of the error and then turn this bit
on to clear the error. An Error Status Bit error cannot be cleared (it is
reset when the Complete Bit Clear statuses turn on or the next Request
0→1: Error Clear
3 Error Clear Request turns on).
1→0 : -
After the operation has been completed, Error Clear Complete turns
on regardless of whether the error is cleared successfully or not. If the
error cannot be cleared, Error Clear Request Error turns on.

0→1: Start Reads 2D code.

1→0 : - If this request is run when the condition of operation is not satisfied,
Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status, Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status,
4 2DC Read Request
[Condition of operation] and 2DC Read Complete are reset, and 2DC Read Request Error turns
The Ready Status is turned on.
on. * It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.
0→1: Start
Starts the lens inspection.
1→0 : -
If this request is run when the condition of operation is not satisfied,
Window Monitoring
5 Window Monitoring Complete is reset, and Window Monitoring Request
Request [Condition of operation]
The Ready Status is turned Error is turned on.
General
0 8 * It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.
Request on.

Starts the job editing.

If the start edit request is received successfully, the job change
request after that is retained temporarily in the controller, and the job is
0→1: Edit Start
1 0 Job Edit Start Request deployed all at once when editing is completed. Use this request if you
1→0: Edit End
want to reduce the communication time used by job editing. If edit start
is received successfully, Job Edit Busy Status turns on. Additionally, if
edit start is received successfully, Job Edit Complete turns on. 1

0 Job Change Request Changes the job number. * 1

1 Rank Change Request Changes the I/O specified characters. * 1
Counter No Change
2 Changes the number of the counter to be changed. * 1
Request
Counter Value Change Changes the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No
3
Request Change Request. * 1
2
Increases the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No
4 Counter Up Request
Change Request. * 1

Reduces the value of the counter set to be displayed for Counter No

5 Counter Down Request
Change Request. * 1

Resets the counter set to be displayed for Counter No Change

6 Counter Reset Request
Request. * 1

0→1: Request Changes the operation information ID. The operation information to the
1→0 : - ID is displayed to System Info Value.* 1

Operation ID Operation information

1 Controller operating time
2 Laser excited time
3 Scanner operating time
System Info IDChange
3 0 101 Number of shutter operations
Request
Number of times the laser safety module has
102
been operated
201 Head temperature
202 Controller temperature
301 Results of the laser power calibration
302 Final execution result of the lens inspection

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-9

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Slot Size Module Address bit Name Status Information Description

Setting String Read
0 Loads the settings.* 1
Request
Marked String Read Loads the marked content.* 1
1
Request Sending the request before marking results in an error.
5
Changes the content to be marked in the current job.
Store the block no. in Request No., the string in Request Data, and the
2 String Change Request
length of the string in Request Data Size. The maximum data length is
250 bytes.
General 0→1: Request Sends communication commands.
0 8
Request 1→0 : - Store the communication command in Request Data and the length
0 Command Send Request
of the string in Request Data Size. The maximum data length is 250
bytes. Store the response in Response Data.
Loads the result of the XY tracking.
7 XY Tracking Result
1 Enter the XY tracking No. into the Request No. Store the response in
Request
Response Data. Sending the request before marking results in an error.
Loads the result of the Z tracking.
2 Z Tracking Result Request Enter the Z tracking No. into Request No. Store the response in
Response Data. Sending the request before marking results in an error.

3 0 Trigger Lock Request

Disables the trigger input.
If this bit turns on while marking, the trigger lock status is activated after
all of the mark data is marked. Test marking and sample marking is
immediately canceled when this bit turns on.
PROFINET

Stops the laser radiation (the internal shutter remains open).

1 Operation Stop Request Use this bit to stop the laser radiation at the desired position while
processing a workpiece.

Function 0: Input Off Stops the marking laser and the guide laser.
1 4 0 2 Laser Stop Request
Request 1: Input On The internal shutter closes while this bit is turned on.
If the controller's internal clock passes midnight when this bit is turned
3 Date Hold Request on, the date of updated string is subtracted one day and the subtracted
date is marked.
Turns on an internal lighting.
4 Internal Lighting Request
* It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.
Measurement Laser Stop Stops the displacement detecting laser.
5
Request * It cannot be used on the MD-X400/450 series.

0 Marking Complete Bit Clear Resets Marking Complete and Start Marking Request Error.

Guide Laser Complete Bit

1 Resets Guide Laser Complete and Guide Laser Request Error.
Clear

Laser Stop Complete Bit

2 Resets Laser Stop Complete and Stop Marking Request Error.
Clear 0→1: Complete Clear
0
1→0 : -
Error Clear Complete Bit
3 Resets Error Clear Complete and Error Clear Request Error.
Clear
2DC Read Complete Bit Resets 2DC Read Complete, 2DC Read Request Error, Mark
4
Clear Check/2DC Read OK Status, and Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status.
Window Monitoring
5 Resets Window Monitoring Complete.
Complete Bit Clear
0→1: Complete Clear
1 0 Job Edit Complete Bit Clear Resets Job Edit Complete and Job Edit Error.
1→0 : -
Job Change Complete Bit
0 Resets Job Change Complete and Job Change Request Error.
Clear
Rank Change Complete Bit
1 Resets Rank Change Complete and Rank Change Request Error.
Clear
Request
2 8 Completion Counter No Change
2 Resets Counter No Complete and Counter No Change Request Error.
Clear Complete Bit Clear
Counter Value Change 0→1: Complete Clear
2 3 Resets Counter Value Complete and Counter Value Change Error.
Complete Bit Clear 1→0 : -
Counter Up Complete Bit
4 Resets Counter Up Complete and Counter Up Request Error.
Clear
Counter Down Complete
5 Resets Counter Down Complete and Counter Down Request Error.
Bit Clear
Counter Reset Complete
6 Resets Counter Reset Complete and Counter Reset Request Error.
Bit Clear
System Info ID Change Resets System Info ID Change Complete and System Info ID Change
3 0
Complete Clear Error.
Setting String Read Resets Setting String Read Complete and Setting String Read Request
0
Complete Bit Clear 0→1: Complete Clear Error.
Marked String Read 1→0 : - Resets Marked String Read Complete and Marked String Read
4 1
Complete Bit Clear Request Error.
String Change Complete
2 Resets String Change Complete and String Change Request Error.
Bit Clear
Command Send Complete 0→1: Complete Clear
7 0 Resets Command Send Complete and Command Send Request Error.
Bit Clear 1→0 : -

* 1 Turns on this bit after storing the job No., I/O specified character No., counter No., and operation information No. in the applicable Request No.
* 2 If you turn on this bit after storing the block No. in Request No., the content will be loaded from the specified block in the current job. Store
the load result in Response Data.

3-10 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Communication Specification of the Controller

Word area for writing a PLC request

In the following areas, the information is divided by word. The information is shown with 2-byte unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
The detailed information of the request from the PLC is written.

Slot Size Module Address Data Type Name Status Information Description

Numbers
3 4 Request No 0 DWord Request No Stores the job No., block No., and counter No. to be changed.
(Four bytes)

Data size
0 Word Request Data Size Stores the data length of “Request Data” in 16-bit binary data.
(Two bytes)

2+ Request Use for String Change Request and Command Send Request. Store
Command function
4 data Parameters the change string and communication command data. Headers and
(Default: 250 bytes)
size for strings delimiters are not required.
2 Character Request Data * Selectable from 32, 64,
128, and 252 bytes on the
* Selectable capacities are from 32, 64, 128, and 252 bytes on the
PLC settings. (Default: 250 bytes.) However, even if 252 bytes is
PLC.
selected, the maximum amount of data that can be sent is 250 bytes.

* 1 If you turn on this bit after storing the block No. in Request No., the content will be loaded from the target block in the current job, and will be

3
stored in Response Data.

PROFINET
Command communications
PROFINET communication can control the laser via command communication.
Since the communication mode is “command/response type”, multiple commands cannot be sent simultaneously. Therefore, make sure to send the
command only after a response has been received.
The command and response data is a combination of comma-delimited parameters.

zz
Communication format
Header and delimiter settings are not required. Store the send data size in “Request Data Size” and the send data in “Request Data” in the PLC
command area. Then set the “Command Send Request” bit to “1” to enable the stored data to be sent to the controller. For the communication
commands, refer to “Communication Interface Manual”.

Other controller specification

Endian
Endian is a method to place multiple-byte data onto the PLC's data memory. The laser marker uses the big endian method. Data having 2 bytes or more
is recorded/sent in sequence from the upper byte.
Typical endians are below.
• PLCs from Siemens: Big endian
• Omron PLC: Little-Endian

GSDML file
GSDML file includes information on the PROFINET functions of the controller.
GSDML file is in the following folder of the PC which Marking Builder Plus was installed on.
C:\Program Files\keyence\MarkingBuilderPlus_Ver*\etc\ Profinet\[model name]
(Version of Marking Builder Plus is in *.)
Copy this file onto your PLC as required.
File name: GSDML-[Version]-Keyence-[Model name]-yyyymmdd.xml
(yyyymmdd is an update time of the file.)

The MD-X400/450 can use an MD-X2000 series GSDML file.

In this case, some displays may be the contents of the MD-X2000 series.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-11

 Communication Specification of the Controller

When “Request” bit does NOT work

If a request is turned on but does not work, check the communications history.
You can check the history of commands sent and received between the PLC and laser marker in the Marking Builder Plus communications history.

zz
Confirmation method
Start Marking Builder Plus, and select the [Maintenance] tab > [Communication] > [Communication History].
The [Communication History] window appears. Click the [Update] button to display the latest history.

3
PROFINET

If the Communication history is empty, the laser marker has not received any Communication.
Double check the communication settings between the laser marker and the PLC, and make sure that the HUB and cable are not defective.

zz
Request format
Each request will be stored in the communication history in the following format:
Command: ***** Request
Response: ***** Request,X (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
However, the requests below have a different format. (X = 0: Success; X = 1: Fail)
Request History format (“>” = command; “<” = response)

> 2DC_Read_Request,0
2DC Read Request
< 2DC_Read_Request,X,[Grade],[Content]

> Job_Edit_Start_Request,[Job No]

Job Edit Start Request
< Job_Edit_Start_Request,X

> Job_Change_Request,[Job No]

Job Change Request
< Job_Change_Request,X

> Rank_Change_Request,[I/O Character No]

Rank Change Request
< Rank_Change_Request,X

> Counter_No_Change_Request,,[Counter No],1

Counter No Change Request
< Counter_No_Change_Request,X,[Counter Current Value]

> Counter_Value_Change_Request,,[Counter No],[Counter Current Value]

Counter Value Change Request
< Counter_Value_Change_Request,X

> System_Info_ID_Change_Request,[System_Info_ID]
System Info ID Change Request
< System_Info_ID_Change_Request,X

> Setting_String_Read_Request,BLK=[Block No],CharacterString

Setting String Read Request
< Setting_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]

> Marked_String_Read_Request,MarkedCharacter=[Job No],[Block No]

Marked String Read Request
< Marked_String_Read_Request,[OK/NG],[Character String]

> String_Change_Request,,[Block No],[Character String]

String Change Request
< String_Change_Request,X

> Window_Monitoring_Request
Window Monitoring Request
< Window_Monitoring_Request,[OK/NG], [Score]

> XY_Tracking_Result_Request,0
XY_Tracking_Result_Request < XY_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [X Coordinate Gap Amount], [Y Coordinate Gap Amount], [θ Gap Amount], [Correlation
Value], [Execution Time], [Result]

> Z_Tracking_Result_Request
Z_Tracking_Result_Request < Z_Tracking_Result_Request, [OK/NG], [Z Coordinate Gap Amount], [X Rotation Angle], [Y Rotation Angle], [Stability], [Execution
Time], [Result]

> [Stored data for Request Data]

Command Send Request
< [Response]

An error may be the cause of the request not working. You can check up to two error codes simultaneously, Error Code 1 and Error Code 2.
Error details and resolutions are listed in the User's Manual for the applicable model.

3-12 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Setup Procedure of PROFINET

Setup Procedure of PROFINET

Perform settings on the [Communication settings] screen of Marking Builder Plus.
Perform the I/O setup with which the PROFINET inputs/outputs data via the Ethernet port of the controller.

• For the Ethernet setup of the controller such as IP address and subnet mask, refer to “Marking Builder Plus User's Manual.”
• This product needs to be restarted when you enable the PROFINET settings and rename any device name.

1 Select [Controller] of the [Settings] tab, and

then [Communication Settings].
4 Select the 2D code reader and marking
verification output assignments.

2 Set [Industrial Ethernet] to [PROFINET].

PROFINET
5 Press [OK].

3 Specify [Device Name].

6 Restart the controller.
Specify the name used for identifying this product in the PROFINET
network.

Use the same name to this product as one used

for connection of this product with the PLC. An
improper name will not allow the PLC to detect
this product, resulting in failure in establishing the
PROFINET communication.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-13

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

Connection Procedure for PROFINET

This section describes the example procedure in which the MD-X2000/2500 series connects to the Siemens S7-1200 series via PROFINET, retrieves the
controller status, and executes commands to control the controller.

Setup of PROFINET Communication

Checking the setup of the Laser marker Modify the settings of the Siemens S7-1200
series.
1 Select [Controller] of the [Settings] tab, and
then [Communication Settings].
1 Start up [Totally Integrated Automation Portal]
with the PC and the CPU connected each
3 2 Configure the Ethernet.
Use the settings below here as an example.
other, and select [Create new project] from
the [Start] menu.
(Modify the settings depending on the destination device).
PROFINET

Parameter Contents

Automatically acquire IP address Uncheck

IP address 192.168.1.20 2 Enter a project name in the [Project name]

column, and select [Create].
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway Not used

MAC address Not used

Port No. Not used

3 After the PROFINET setup, press [OK].

This example sets the MD-X2500 series with the following
parameters.
(Modify the settings depending on the destination device).

3 Double click [Add new device] under the

[Device & networks] menu, and select the PLC
to be used.
Select [CPU 1211C DC/DC/DC] as an example.

Parameter Contents

Industrial Ethernet PROFINET

Device name md-x1xxx

2DC reader/marking
confirmation 1: 2DC reader/2: Marking verification
output assignment

4 Restart the controller.

Be sure to restart the controller when you enable

the PROFINET settings or rename any device
name. The PROFINET communication will not
work without a restart.

3-14 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

4 When setting MD-X2000/2500 series for the

first time, install GSDML file.
6 Configure the connection between the MD-
X2000/2500 series and the PLC.
Select [Install general station description file (GSD)] of the [Option] Connect to the Ethernet port on the PLC by dragging and dropping
tab. from the Ethernet port shown in green of the “md-x2xxx.”
Select the file name of “GSDML-V2.32-Keyence-MDX-yyyymmdd.
xml (yyyymmdd is the update date of the file)” and press [Install].

Move the mouse cursor away. If the indication below appeared, the
network has been established.

7 Double click the “MD-X1000/2500 series” icon

on the [Device view] screen.

8 Set the MD-X2000/2500 series and the PLC 3

from the [PROFINET interface] screen of

PROFINET
[Properties].

• GSDML file is in the following folder of the PC which

Marking Builder Plus was installed on.
<C:\Program Files\keyence\MarkingBuilderPlus_
Ver*\etc\ Profinet\[model name]>
(* is the version of Marking Builder Plus.)
• When the GSDML file has been installed, this setup
procedure is not required. Re-installation generates
an error without loading the file.
Set the IP address, subnet mask, and PROFINET device name.

5
Use the settings below here as an example.
Create the connection with the MD-X2000/2500 (Modify the settings depending on the destination device).
series. PLCs from Siemens
Setting items MD-X2000/2500 series
CPU 1211C DC/DC/DC
Through [Device] - the [Device & networks] screen - [Hard ware
Catalog] - [Filter], open “Other field devices” - “PROFINET IO” - IPaddress 192.168.0.20 192.168.0.30
“Sensors” - “KEYENCE CORPORATION.” - “Keyence Laser Marker,”
and drag and drop “ MD-X2XXX Series.” Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

PROFINET device
MD-x2xxx plc_1
name

Shortest possible
8 ms -
Update interval

Drag and drop

Make sure that the display screen has turned to

the [Network view] tab while dropping.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-15

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

9 Double click the “MD-X2000/2500 series” icon

on the [Device & networks] screen.
11 Choose a tag name for each address as
required.
Create a new tag table from [Project tree] - [CPU unit] - [PLC tags] -

10 The Device overview appears. Then assign

the devices for MD-X and PLC.
[Add new tag table].
Here the tag table is being created with the MD information area
named MDX_Monitor, and the MD specified area named MDX_
Control.
Assign the MD information area device to [I address], and assign
the PLC specified area device to [Q address].

3
Here the device is assigned as an example as shown below.
PROFINET

Module Address

Machine Status I address 200 - 203 Double click

Function Status I address 204 - 207

Completion Status I address 208 - 215

Error Status Bits I address 216 - 223 €

€PLC specified area device tag table
Error Codes I address 224 - 231

Operate Parameter I address 232 - 247

Marking Check/2D Code Read Result I address 248 - 255

Count Result Data I address 256 - 259

Response Data I address 260 - 391

General Request Q address 200 - 207

Function Request Q address 208 - 211

Request Completion Clear Q address 212 - 219

Request No Q address 220 - 223

Request Parameters for strings Q address 224 - 353

€
€MD information area device tag table

Edit the name of the new tag table and edit the list inside tag table.
Set a function name in [Name], and set the address which has
been assigned in [Device overview] beforehand in relation to that
function in [Address]. Here set the items below based on the device
map.

3-16 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

zz
MDX_Monitor Name Address Module
Start Marking Request Error %I216.0
Guide Laser Request Error %I216.1
Stop Marking Request Error %I216.2
Error Clear Request Error %I216.3
2DC Read Request Error %I216.4
Job Edit Error %I217.0
Name Address Module Job Change Request Error %I218.0
Ready Status %I200.0 Rank Change Request Error %I218.1
Error Status %I200.1 Counter No Change Request Error %I218.2 Error Status
Warning Status %I200.2 Counter Value Change Request Error %I218.3 Bits

Error Warning Status %I200.3 Counter Up Request Error %I218.4

Shutter Status %I200.4 Counter Down Request Error %I218.5
Network Status
Job Change Ready Status
%I200.5
%I200.6
Counter Reset Request Error
System Info ID Change Error
%I218.6
%I218.7 3
Laser Emitted Status %I201.0 Setting String Read Request Error %I220.0

PROFINET
Shutter Control Status %I201.1 Machine Marked String Read Request Error %I220.1
Remote Interlock Status %I201.2 Status
String Change Request Error %I220.2
Safety Shutter Status %I201.3 Command Send Request Error %I223.0
Busy Status %I202.0 Error Code 1 %IW224
Marking Busy Status %I202.1 Error Code 2 %IW226 Error Codes
Guide Laser Busy Status %I202.2 Command Send Error Status %IW228
Job Change Busy Status %I202.3 Job No Status %IW232
Communication Priority Error Status %I202.4 Counter No Status %IW234
Job Edit Busy Status %I202.5 Counter Value Status %ID236 Operate
Mark Check /2DC Read Busy Status %I202.6 Rank Value Status %IW240 Parameter

Trigger Lock Status %I204.0 System Info ID %IW242

Operation Stop Status %I204.1 System Info Value %ID244
Laser Control Status %I204.2 Marking Check Score / 2DC Read Grade
%IW248 Marking
Status Check/2D
Date Hold Status %I204.3
Marking Check/2DC Read Total Count Code Read
Date Attach Status %I205.0 %IW250 Result
Status
Counter End1 Status %I205.1 Function Count Result
Status Total Marking Count Status %ID256
Counter End2 Status %I205.2 Data
Counter End3 Status %I205.3 Response Data Size %IW260 Response
Response Data %ID262 Data
Counter End4 Status %I205.4
Mark Check/2DC Read OK Status %I205.5
Mark Check/2DC Read NG Status %I205.6
Marking Complete 1 %I205.7
Marking Complete 2 %I208.0
Guide Laser Complete %I208.1
Laser Stop Complete %I208.2
Error Clear Complete %I208.3
2DC Read Complete %I208.4
Job Edit Complete %I209.0
Job Change Complete %I210.0
Rank Change Complete %I210.1
Counter No Complete %I210.2 Completion
Counter Value Complete %I210.3 Status

Counter Up Complete %I210.4

Counter Down Complete %I210.5
Counter Reset Complete %I210.6
System Info ID Change Complete %I211.0
Setting String Read Complete %I212.0
Marked String Read Complete %I212.1
String Change Complete %I212.2
Command Send Complete %I215.0

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-17

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

zz
MDX_Control 12 Select [Save] from the [Project] tab and store
the settings.

13 Select [Download to device] from the [Online]

tab and send the settings to the PLC.

Name Address Module

14 Turn the CPU mode switch to RUN.
The RUN LED (green) of the CPU turns on after the connection is
Start Marking Request %Q200.0 established.

Guide Laser Request %Q200.1. IF THE RUN LED DOES NOT TURN ON
• The PROFINET settings may be incorrect; the
Stop Marking Request %Q200.2 cables connection may be incorrect; or the laser
Error Clear Request %Q200.3 marker may have not started up.
• Once the communication is disconnected, the RUN
2DC Read Request %Q200.4 LED turns off. In this case, use the mode switch of

3 Job Edit Start Request

Job Change Request
%Q201.0
%Q202.0
the CPU to execute the MRES and switch to the
RUN mode.

Rank Change Request %Q202.1

PROFINET

Counter No Change Request %Q202.2 General

Counter Value Change Request %Q202.3 Request

Counter Up Request %Q202.4

Counter Down Request %Q202.5
Counter Reset Request %Q202.6
System Info ID Change Request %Q203.0
Setting String Read Request %Q205.0
Marked String Read Request %Q205.1
String Change Request %Q205.2
Command Send Request %Q207.0
Trigger Lock Request %Q208.0
Operation Stop Request %Q208.1 Function
Laser Stop Request %Q208.2 Request

Date Hold Request %Q208.3

Marking Complete Bit Clear %Q212.0
Guide Laser Complete Bit Clear %Q212.1
Laser Stop Complete Bit Clear %Q212.2
Error Clear Complete Bit Clear %Q212.3
2DC Read Complete Bit Clear %Q212.4
Job Edit Complete Bit Clear %Q213.0
Job Change Complete Bit Clear %Q214.0
Rank Change Complete Bit Clear %Q214.1
Counter No Change Complete Bit Clear %Q214.2 Request
Counter Value Change Complete Bit Completion
%Q214.3 Clear
Clear
Counter Up Complete Bit Clear %Q214.4
Counter Down Complete Bit Clear %Q214.5
Counter Reset Complete Bit Clear %Q214.6
System Info ID Change Complete Clear %Q215.0
Setting String Read Complete Bit Clear %Q216.0
Marked String Read Complete Bit Clear %Q216.1
String Change Complete Bit Clear %Q216.2
Command Send Complete Bit Clear %Q219.0
Request No %QD220 Request No
Request Data Size %QW224 Request
Parameters
Request Data %QD226 for strings

If the name for each device via tag table is determined, the
device names are displayed when creating or executing
the job.

3-18 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

Controlling the Laser Marker Controller

This part describes the procedure to control the laser marker through the PLC by the PROFINET communication.

Switching and Marking the Job No. of the Laser Marker

Ready
zz
Referential ladder diagram
The following is a referential job for switching and marking the job No.
Programming for practical operations needs to consider additional
Request Parameter functions such as error processing.
PLCs from Siemens
Job Change Request
(1)

Job Change Complete

Start Marking Request

3
(1) (2) (3)

PROFINET
(2)
(1) Require switching of the job.
Store the job No. to be set in [Request No] and turn the [Job
Change Request] bit into “1.”
(2) Check that the job change has been completed.
The “Job Change Request Complete” bit turns to “1.”
(3) Enter a trigger.
• While changing the job No., the “Ready Status” bit is “0”
and the “Busy Status” bit is “0.”
• If the job No. switching fails, the “Job Change Request (3)
Error” bit is “1.”
• The “Job Change Complete” bit is cleared by turning the
“Job Change Complete Bit Clear” bit into “1” or start of
the next operation. Before that, the bit remains “1.”
• Each bit remains “1” until the completion bit or the next
operation starts.

(4)

(1) Turn on “Start1” and store “1” in “ Request Parameter “

(2) Turn “Job Change Request” bit into “1.”
If “Job Change Request Complete” turns on, “Job Change Request”
turns off.
(3) Confirm the job change has been completed and turn
the “Start Marking Request” bit into “1.”
If “Job Change Complete” turns on, “Start Marking Request” turns
on. If “Marking Complete 2” turns on, “Start Marking Request” turns
off.
(4) Turn each “Complete Clear” bit into “1.”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-19

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

Use the command communication to change and mark the job No.
Ready
zz
Referential ladder diagram
The following is a referential job for switching and marking the job No.
using the command communication.
Request Data Size Programming for practical operations needs to consider additional
functions such as error processing.
PLCs from Siemens
Request Data

(1)
Command Send Request

Command Send Complete

Start Marking Request (2)

3
(1) (2) (3)

(1) Require sending of commands

Store the data contents to be sent in “Request Data” and the
data size in “Request Data Size,” and turn the “Command Send
PROFINET

Request” bit into “1.”

(2) Check that the command send has been completed. (3)
The “Command Send Complete” bit turns to “1.”
(3) Enter a trigger.
• After the command communication and change of the
job No., the “Ready Status” bit turns to “0” and the “Busy
Status “ bit turns to “1.”
• If sending of the command failed, the “Command Send
Request Error” bit turns to “1.” (4)
• The “Command Send Complete” bit is cleared by turning
the “ Command Send Complete Bit Clear “ bit into “1” or
start of the next operation. Before that, the bit remains (1) Turn on “Start2,” store “4” in “Data Size” and “GA,1”
“1.” in “Data.”
• Each bit remains “1” until the completion bit or the next
operation starts. (2) Turn “Command Send Request” bit into “1.”
• The data length of the response to “ Command Send If “Command Send Complete” turns on, “Command Send Request”
Request” is stored in “Response Data Size” and its turns off.
contents in “Response Data.” (3) Check that the command processing has been
completed and turn the “Start Marking Request” bit
into “1.”
If “Command Send Complete” turns on, “Start Marking Request”
turns on. If “Marking Complete 2” turns on, “Start Marking Request”
turns off.
(4) Turn each “Complete Clear” bit into “1.”

3-20 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Connection Procedure for PROFINET

Reading the Marked 2D Code and Acquiring the Assessment Result

Ready
zz
Referential ladder diagram
The following is a referential program for reading the marked 2D code
and acquiring the assessment result.
Start Marking Request Programming for practical operations needs to consider additional
functions such as error processing.
PLCs from Siemens
Marking Complete 2

2DC Read Request

(1)

2DC Read Complete

2DC Read Grade Status

3
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(1) Mark the 2D code.

(2)
Turn “Start Marking Request” bit into “1.”
(2) Confirm that marking has been completed.

PROFINET
The “Marking Complete 2” bit turns to “1.”
(3) Read the 2D code.
Turn the “2DC Read Request” bit into “1.”
(4) Confirm the 2D code reading has been completed.
The “2DC Read Complete” bit turns to “1.”
(3)
(5) Load the assessment result of the 2D code.
At the same time as loading of the 2D code is completed, the result
is stored in “2DC Read Grade Status.”

• The 2D code can be read not only by directing “2DC

Read Request” through the PROFINET communication,
but also by the Marking Builder Plus after marking.
“Marking Builder Plus User's Manual 2D Code Reader”
• The “Ready Status” bit is “0” while reading the 2D code.
Also, the “Busy Status” bit is “1.” (4)
• If reading of the 2D code failed, the “2DC Read Request
Error” bit turns to “1.”
• The “2DC Read Complete” bit is cleared by turning the (1) Turn on “Start3” and mark the current job.
“2DC Read Complete Bit Clear” bit into “1” or start of the
next operation. Before that, the bit remains “1.” (2) Confirm that the marking has been completed and turn
• Each bit remains “1” until the completion bit or the next the “2DC Read Request” bit into “1.”
operation starts. If “Marking Complete 2” turns on, “2DC Read Request” turns off.
If “2DC Read Complete” turns on, “2DC Read Request” turns off.
(3) Confirm the completion of the 2d code read, and store
the assessment result of the “2DC Read Grade Status”
in arbitrary memory.
If “2DC Read Complete” turns on, the assessment of “2DC Read
Grade Status” is copied to the %MB100.
(4) Turn each “Complete Clear” bit into “1.”

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-21

 Execute Ladder Program

Execute Ladder Program

Download the created ladder program Confirm/monitor the state of laser
on the PLC. marker

1 Select “Online” - “Download to device” on the

menu bar.
1 Select “Online” - “Go online” on the menu bar.

2 After it has gone online, select “MDX_Monitor”

3 from “PLC tags”.

Select “PG/PC interface” and “Connection to subnet” based on

PROFINET

the communication environment settings, and press Load to start

download.

2 Turn the CPU mode switch to “RUN.”

3 Press the monitor button
The RUN LED (green) of the CPU turns on after the connection is The bit state of the current address is displayed in “Monitor value”.
established. In the following, the bit of Ready (%I200.0), StartUp (%I200.5) and
Laser Emit (%201.0) is “1”, and is Marking Ready state.
IF THE RUN LED DOES NOT TURN ON
• The PROFINET settings may be incorrect; the
cables connection may be incorrect; or the laser
marker may have not started up.
• Once the communication is disconnected, the RUN
LED turns off. In this case, use the mode switch of
the CPU to execute the MRES and switch to the
RUN mode.

3-22 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

 Execute Ladder Program

Execute ladder program 4 Turn the “Start3” bit into “1.”

The marking and reading are started.
Right click the contact point A of “Start3”, and select

1
“Modify”→”Modify to 1” to change the bit to “1”.
Select “Online” - “Go online” on the menu
Right click
bar.

2 After it has gone online, select the created

ladder program from “Job blocks.”

3
“Main” program is switched to in the following.

PROFINET
5 Confirm the judgement result.
Judgment result is stored to “%MB100”.
“4” is stored in the following, therefore, the grade becomes A.

6 After turning the “Start3” bit into “0,” turn the

3 Press the monitor button

“Clear3” bit into “1.”
The bits of Print Complete and Code Read Complete become “0”.
The ladder display is linked with the bit.
IF THE ERROR LED DOES NOT GO OFF
The PROFINET communication with Laser Marker
may have not been established. Confirm the
communication settings of PLC and laser marker, then
restart the laser marker.

- MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual - 3-23

 Execute Ladder Program

MEMO

3
PROFINET

3-24 - MD-X2000/2500 Series Communication Interface User’s Manual -

MEMO
Revision history

Revision history Edition number Revision details

March 2020 Official release

June 2020 2nd edition

 WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would
necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans,
for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE
COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY
MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS,
EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S
CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing
warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information
provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2020 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 252085GB 2060-2 927GB Printed in Japan